Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
BY
ALFRED
C.
WOOLNER.
M.A. (OXON),
PRINCIPAL OF THE ORIENTAL COLLEGE,
LAHORE.
PUBLISHED
BY THE
CALCUTTA
PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.
1917.
-^/ u>
Ganthaarena niaguruno
Siri-
Arthur.
Anthony.
Macdonbll.
-acarianarindassa Baillatitthatthassa
nam a
aavvaim uvaaranaim sumaria
imassa potthaassa adimmi
sasineham
ahilihidam.
MJi98871
I*KEFA(
Degree
courses
of
in
E.
invariably
is
Sanskrit
almost
include
Drama,
practice,
in
Prakrit.
In
the Sanskrit chayd, which most editions provide for him on the
same page.
reading the
may
with which he
is
already familiar in
who
shadow.'
of
have any
definite
knowledge
any one
One
no convenient book of
One object
of
with a guide
of the Saura-
seni
times
mate knowledge
of at least
modern Indo-Aryan
language.
In the Sanskrit he learns at school, he becomes familiarised with the stereotyped literary form of the ancient language.
If
of
vi
PREFACE.
Indo- Aryan.
For
this
texts,
and many
works
of reference available.'
neglected.
In
Sanskrit
itself.
have found
Scriptures,
in
Pali,
the language
the oldest
Buddliist
The
tlie
main
this
It is
hoped that
Method
is
to begin with
But the
There are
Pah
is
too archaic to
make a good
curricula,
central point,
and
it is
and generally
regarded
appropriate
only
to
students of Buddhism.
actually
first
it is
come
and
has
most
of
Sauraseni.
For
this,
among
other reasons,
it
of the subject,
is
Grammar
'
Dramatic
Particularly
.A.
recommended
Vedic
(>iinnninr
for
Students
by
Prof.
19)1).
PREFACE.
Prakrits.
Vll
type, and
may be memorised.
The Extracts
to 14 should
then
knowledge acquired
may be
reading.'
will
and dialects as
described in Chapters IV to
to the end.*
X, and
illustrated in Extracts 15
The specimens
of
PaH and
intended as
The student
of
much
larger
number
forms
from
his
mother tongue.
is
The Index
Transliteration.
several reasons.
The Roman
script
has
been used
for
scripts, is partly
due to the
script,
fact
that Hindi
in the
same
but
A word
VH
as
written in Devae.g.
may
dharma or dharam,
'
If
he
will
let
him
The most
is
the Mrcchakatikam.
Vlli
PREFACE.
as
if
^I5
so on.
Confusion
is
in-
creased
tion
when the
modern word.
more atomic
Another reason
that the
Roman
script being
Enghsh.
make
To make
it
use of
many books
of
is
almost as
important to
of
un-
may
be experienced
by the beginner.
On
refer-
made
enquiry that
still
Apart from
facilitating the
it is
study
of the Indian
Drama, and
of Indian Philology,
hoped that
this little
some
great
of our students
field of
outside the
it
Sanskrit
circle.
of this,
is
impos-
sible to obtain
(lulmarg.
191
A. C.
WOOLNER.
TABLE OF TRANSLITERATION.
2.
^^ pamca
for
pafic
^^
^ damda
SJ^,
sainkha
for
for
jambu
for
but see
3.
35
9.
Note.
4.
^
^
is
this causes
letter
r, cerebral oS by 1. In practice no confusion with the vowels The 1. f and d was probably pronounced as a cerebral r long before
represented by
was devised.
is
In general
it
us anything
It is
^T
was pronounced as Bengali renders it to-day. Even if so, we may feel sui'e that a Midlander would use his own sounds iu pronouncing either Prakrit.
CONTENTS.
Pages
Preface Table of Transliteration Corrections
. .
.
. .
v-viii
ix-x
.
xv
PART
Chapter
I:
I.
Subject Defined.
Three periods of Indo-Aryan speech Three stages of the middle period Various uses of the word Prakrt
1-4
Prakrits
4r-7
mance languages
7-10
Chapter IV
Phonetics.
.
Single Consonants.
A. Initial I to C. Final 29
8. B Medial
.
9 to
.
28.
.
10-16
Chapter V
Compound Consonants.
Assimilation
Nasal and 33 Two mutes 34 Mute 35 Mute and Sibilant 38 Semivowel and Mute 38 and 41 Two Nasals 46 Nasal and Sibilant 47 Nasal and Semivowel 48 Sibilant and Semivowel 49 Two Semivowels
50 Svarabhakti
:
57
..
..
..
17-23
Chapter VI
of
Vowels.
Substitutes for
r 60 Change for ai, au 61 Quantity 62 Lengthening 63 Shortening 67 Vowel for Vowel 69 Omission of Vowels 74 Samprasarana 75 Epenthesis 76
".
23-28
77 B.
Vowels
80
..
29-30
XU
CONTENTS.
Pages
SOI
stems
88 U
91
declension
stems Variants
90
96 AN
stems
|j
98 IN
92 stems
.Sl-41
100
-AT
nouns
104 Pro-
114
Imperative
5>
116
Optative
117 Future 118 Passive 119 Causatives 120 Participles and Infinitive 121 Gerund 122 Irregular Verb.s 123 Past
Participles 125 Irregular Indicatives 126 Irregular Futures 134 Irregular Passives 135 Infinitives 136 Gerundives 137
42-57
..
..
..
57-69
Chapter XI
Jain
Prakrit Literaturk. Ardha-Magadhi ahgas J Siin Maharastri-Kavya Setubandha Gaudavaho Hala Dramatic Prakrits Prakrit Grammars
:
Literature
70-80
PART
Extract No.
1.
TT.
81-82
2.
83-86
86-89
3.
(Vidiisaka)
4.
Sakuntahx
Translation
(Before
the
King)
,
89-92
5.
S'auraseni.
ine
,
(Hero..
.
92-96
96-97
6.
7.
S'auraseni.
S'auraseni.
(Scene
.
97100
HX> 102
8.
(Jester ad..
..
9.
Maharastri.
of
Verses
trom
Sattasai
..
H Ala
102 107
CONTENTS.
Xill
Pages
Extract No.
10.
Maharastri. kuntaia
Maharastri.
107-109
,,
,,1112.
Three Mrcchakatikam
Verses
..
from
..
109-110
,,
,,
Maharastri.
Camphor
,,
110-112
112-113
,,13.
Maharastri.
RatnavaU
One
.
Song
.
.
,,14.
Translation
lament
Return to Ayodhya
..
..
. .
.
113-122 122-127
,,
,,
15.
,,
,,
16.
King
. .
127-133 134-139
,,
,,
17.
Kakkuka
.
Inscrip. .
Translation
,.
,,18.
19.
139-144
144-149
,,
,,
Udayana Tmws
.
.
.
,,
,,
20.
149-156
156-165
,,
,,
21.
The
..
. .
,,
,,
22.
Fisherman
.
165-168
168-169
169-171
,,
,,
23.
Stha. .
,,
,,
24.
Magadhi.
Same Same
..
play.
The King's
..
..
brother-in-law
,,
,,
25.
Magadhi.
ses
play.
S'akari ver..
..
171-172
,,
,,26.
play.
.
172-174
174-176
,,
,,27.
Two
. .
CONTENTS.
Pages
Extract No.
28.
176-179 179-180
29.
Pravacanasara
30. 31.
32.
Bhasa
Pali.
180-184
184^186
186-188
188-190
In-
Pali.
Pali.
33.
34.
Old
Hathigumplia
Inscription
scription
35.
191
193 194
Old Magadhi.
.
Index of Examples
195-214
215
Students' Bibliography
(OKIIIXTIONS.
Page 11,
,,
,,
7, for
,,
,,
,,12, for
,,
,,
Insert a comma after 85, penultimate line. delete stop after " vanquishing."
87, line 9, for nivinno read iiivinno.
,,
So
in note 2.
,,
Footnote 6 refers to
line 8 vinnaviadi.
Note
,,
13, for
,,
,,
Note
J,
,,
9, for
,,
,,
,,
115, footnote.
-supadi-tthia-.
to chastise the
monkeys."
,,
83, for
,, ,,
,,
,,
,,
INTRODUCTION TO PEAKRIT.
PART
I.
CHAPTER
The history
of the
I.
SUBJECT DEFINED.
North Indian or Indo-Arj^an languages
divided
into
may
(i)
be conveniently
three
periods
ancient,
mediaeval^
and modern.
of the ancient or
(a)
The speech
sented in literature
Old Indian period is repreby the language of the Rig Veda, (&) by
To
this period
(c)
down
in literature
The mediaeval or Middle Indian period is represented by Pali and the Prakrits, It comprises all the
from the time (whenever
it
dialects
grammar
had produced
down
to the
about 1100
a.d.)
when
Our knowledge
times.
from a
literary
works.
of
Asoka. The literature comprises the Pjxli Canon of the "Southern" or Hinayana Buddhists, the Prakrit Canon of
2
the Jains,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
the Prjikrit of Lyrics, Epics and Plays and the
Prakrit grammars.
(iii)
The beginning
of tlie third or
It Hes
between the
apabhramsa
described by
Hemacandra
the
The oldest poem in Western Hindi is the Prithi Raj Rasau by Chand Bardai of Lahore (about 1200 a.d.).
The middle period can be again divided into three stages Old Prakrit (or Pali); (2) Middle Prakrit; (3) Late (1)
Prakrit or Apabhramsa.
(1)
(a)
down
The
Pali of the
as the
than the
(d)
of early plays,
such as those
of
A^vaghosa
of
in Central Asia.
(a)
(b)
Maharastri. the
the other Drama-
Deccan,
the
the
is
later Jain
books
(d)
Paisaci, in
which the
is
Brhatkatha
said to
known
They represent the stage reached by ordinary colloquial speech when the Prakrit type of speech as found in the plays was already archaic, and had been refined and stereotyped by the grammarians. By the time that Hemacandra recorded a
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
particular
archaic.
Apabhram^a
of the
West,
this
This book
or
is
middle period
the
and
in particular
with
especially
the
Dramatic
Prakrits.
prakrti has
of
two
lines of
meaning
(a)
anything as opposed to a
:
modification,
is
as
in
Samkhya Philosophy
prakrta
(6)
means what
probable that
(S'auraseni
'prakrta^
was
in this
applied to ordinary
common
speecii as distinct
of later
samskrtam.
This
if it
be not historically
as the basis
Practically
and
only in a late
If in
word is not found in Sanskrit at all, or work and obviously borrowed from Prakrit.
all
on the other
untrue to say
Midland Prakrit,
4
of
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
the
MadhyadeSa on which
Classical Sanskrit
was mainly
based.
(a)
to refer to
(Pali
were some-
some writers*
Out of
various
as
it
fossilised
living
and ever-
changing dialects.
CHAPTER
PRAKRITS.
The
following are the
:
II.
p^
more important
being excluded)
M.
S*.
Maharastri
S'auraseni
)
f
>
Dramatic Prakrits.
Mg.
AMg.
J. J.
Mag"adhi Ardha-Magadhi
Jain-Maharastri
Jain- S'auraseni
^
\
)
M.
S'.
Jain Canon.
(Apa.
1
ApabhramSa.)
and Sanskrit uses
'
Pali
'
for the
Middle
Britaumica,
XlXth
Edition.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
M.
For others first. and then "the rest is like some Maharastri." Danclin remarks (K.D. 1.35) Mahardstrdsraydm
:
who speak Sauraseni, sing their songs in The Maharastri lyrics were famous far beyond Maharastram. The same language is used for the
This language of the
carries further
Deccan poets
of omitting
single
consonants
between vowels
{vide
it is
10).
This
is
the
important.
is
It is
not to be supposed
It
many
modern Marathi.
S'.
its
S'auraseni was the Prakrit of the Madhyade^a taking the country round Mathura (' Muttra').
the ordinary prakrit of a Sanskrit drama.
It is
This
spoken
by
This Prakrit
is
the nearest to
Sanskrit.
It
arose in the
same
on
countrj'-,
and
is
spoken
language,
It
which
classical
Owing however
it
to
was overfailed
shadowed
continually influenced by
progress.
Sanskrit,
to
Mag-adhi is the Prakrit of the East. Its geographical centre was in the ancient Magadha not far from the land of modern Magahl, a dialect of Bihari. In the plays Magadhi is
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Dialects of
Magadhi
Dhakki
in the
Mrcchakatikam.
its
^ by ^,
The nominative singular of -a stems end in -e. "^ remains and even replaces ^, (For further particulars vide Chap. X). Where other Prakrits say haliho, Magadhi has ha&te others so rdd = so raja, Magadhi se laa.
;
Jain Prakrits.
oldest
Ardha
prakrit based
on the dialect
In
its
spoken between
phonetic character
preserves
It
more
grammar than
S'auraseni,
H^
M.
of
Maharastri.
J.
S'.
The language
of the
Digambara Canon
in
some
res-
Apabhramsa
for
India
(a)
for
anything
(6)
(c)
a literary
Apabhramsa described in detail by the grammarians is the Ndgara Apabhramsa which appears to have belonged to Gujarat. To this is said to be related the Vrdcada Apabhramsa of Sindh. Dhakki and some other dialectic forms of the main Prakrits are sometimes styled apabhramins. If wc had records of the
of
form
The only
literary
apabhramsas spoken
in the areas
Even
as
it is,
the tendencies of
rules
Apabhramsa
in phonetics
INTRODUOTIOxV TO PRAKRIT.
and specimens given by Hemacandra, help to bridge the gap between typical Prakrit and the modern languages.
The use
Chapter
Drama
is
discussed in
XI on
Prakrit Literature.
and
Chapter
on the classification
CHAPTER
Prakrit (including Pali) was ancient
still
III.
of case forms
number
of
Brahmanas.
lyrics
Pali
and plays.
approach-
The time was approaching when a noun might have only two
or three distinct endings and the verb was reduced to little more than one tense and two participles. The ambiguity thus produced was avoided by new devices, and out of the ruins of
,
modern
the
Though simplified, yet the remaining Prakrit grammar is of same type as Sanskrit grammar. There is a strong
to
tendency
that
reduce
all
declensions
all
to
The Dative
disappears.
The
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Tlie
found
unnecessary.
The
Atmanepada
survived
after the
ing.
its original
mean-
But
resort to postpositions
for
or auxihary
necessary
ordinary
to
tlie
down
ApabhramSa
stage.
As
Pali,
8uccessivel3' lost
of the this
day, or of the
locality,
tendency and
Apart from
lated
main changes
arising in
rakta
;
frutto)
sette).
sajpta
became raita (as Latin fructu-s became became satla (as Latin septem became
of the
Italian
:
Some
.?",
ai,
%T
au,
^ ya
shadowy
'^
^ to
and
bridge hiatus),
U &a (except in
is
missing),
sa
Visarga; whereas the only sounds contained in Prakrit and not recorded for Sanskrit are the short
vowels e and
6.
Final
Not more than two consonants can follow a short vowel, nor more than one follow a long vowel.
consonants are avoided.
[For details see Chapters
IV
to VI.]
in the case of a particu-
of
such changes
not
immediately'
suggest Vakpatiraja,
the other hand some
majority
is
On
could
knowledge
true
From
this
circumstance
it
may
be understood
that
the
among
the edu-
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
cated.
Moreover a speaker
would
easily
learn
to
recognise
many
Sanskrit
was
still
less
marked.
Still
we should
between
'
the
differences
of
same language. At this stage though differences existed the new speech had not attained a separate existence, it was not yet distinct enough to be recognized as a separate language capable of having a fixed grammar and a literature of its own.
Even
in the
Rigveda we
'
that
is
phonetic
variations
Prakrits.
"'
instead of S'rithird
^rath.
From
this
and
similar instances
it is
between the language of the hymns and contemporary speech. Rather the inclusion of such " prakritisms " in the sacred
texts indicates that the priests were not yet conscious of the
difference.^
An
interesting parallel
to
the history
of
the Indo-Aryan
Of several old
of the
Italic dialects,
and then
Roman
Empire,
Christian Church of
1
became the language of the largest the middle ages, and thence the language
It
It has to be
scious.
Men
slip into
remembered that phonetic changes are generally unconnew pronunciations without knowing that they
have done so. They will therefore retain archaic spelhngs centuries after the sounds have changed. This is very conspicvious in Tibetan and in
English.
10
of
INTRODUCTION TO I'KAKRIT.
Science
and Philosophy
their
until
the
modern languages
of
Europe asserted
in India, Latin
independent existence.
Like Sanskrit
of conversation
between
educated
men
religion Latin
mouths
of priests,
and common people caught stray phrases of it. The mediaeval quack or schoolmaster, however ignorant, must needs air his
Latin.'
of ana-
grammar
until prepo-
Some
changes as
India
may
be styled prakritic.
Economy
of
effort, progressive
cities,
who adopted
work both
in
the
Aryan
all
these
at
India and
Europe.
CHAPTER
IV.
PHONETICS.
Single Consonants.
1.
A. Initial.
The general
(^T,
{ 7).
rule
is
tliat a sing'le
consonant
at
thfi
s,
beginning- of a
n, y,
ands
^, U, W).
y
I
is
cerebralised
'
-n
iiv.
jai'
= ?/nrfi,
S'aur. also
has jadi
'\
Y
i
2.
}0^i=yogi.
and
become
S (8).
The
is
initial
usually treated as
it
was
in
A
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
putta = pM/ra, but dryaputra becomes ajjaiitta.
11
paasei
3.
= prakdsayati.
aadam
or
agadam = drjaiam.
vi
= ca.
te
In tdvat and
to d as in the
middle of a word,
ma dava = ma
te.
na de = na
4.
te.
piduno de = pitus
tado de = tatas
In several dialects
derivatives.
S".
bh becomes h
in the root
bhu and
its
M. ho'i^hhavati
(Saur. bhodi).
= 6^ams?/aii.
member
a com-
S'.
(5).
Ph
S'.
the second
of
pound
(6).
Aspiration.
kh ph
for k.
khujja = kubja.
S'.
khel=
krid.
M. panasa = pawasa "bread-fruit tree," an aspirated sibilant becomes ch. AMg. chava = M. AMg. Pali chapa = ^a6a or kdha "young animal."
for p.
phanasa.
Change
of
Place of Articulation.
Palatal for Dental.
Examples,
M. citthai.
S. citthadi.
Mg.
cht\\B,^\
= tist}iaii.
M. dhankha = dhvanksa
"crow."
n
(8).
for n.
The
three sibilants
S (TT
W '^)
we have the
pala-
tal i).
9. B. Medial.
Medial or intervocal
(^, T,
'^,
k,
(T,
g-,
c, j,
t,
d,
are
generally dropped.
^,
^).
M. loa = Zo^a, saala = saA;aZa, anura a =awMmg'a, juala = yugala, naara = wagram, p aiir a = pracMra, bhoana =
bhojana, rasaala = rasatoto,
hiai^Si
= hrdaya.
12
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
^).
Medial p, b, v, are sometimes dropped. (^, W, jM. rVLQ, = rupa, ym\\a, = vihucUw,, d\a,ha, = diva sa. Medial y is always dropped ('?).
,
vioB.
= viyoga,
'p\B,
= priya.
Note.
of Sanskrit or
Magadhi, and
in writing, except in
MSS. written
by the Jains,
e.g., hiysby Q.
= hrdaya.
between
10
Lyrics.
It
naturally leads to
kavi, or kapi\
ambiguity.
string of
Kai may
represent
{
Icati,
A
the
= udaka)
The
has lost
all
all
conservative.
Hemacandra
ndyakah,
tells us, k, t,
gf,
= dgatah,
sabhalau =saphalakani.
Some
p remain unchanged.
Examples.
S'aurj &,didh.i
pdritosika,
= atifhi
'ka.dhedvi
= kathayatu,
paridosia =
,
Kira-
da. = Kirdta, Sinedi = dnayati ta.do = tatah, ]s.\dci = krta, Sarassadi = /Sam^ ga.da, = gata, sakkada = sams^'r/a,
Magadhi:
pii]ido^'m
= pdritosika,
^ASkdum
= svdgatam h&ge
,
Asogai
= Aioka,
loga
Pah
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
12.
13
of tlie charac-
we have one
tlie
between
Sauraseni.
14
I
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
h
S".
( 13)
is
doubled.
ujju = r;M,
1.
M.'nakkha = nakha, M.
S'.
ekka = eA;a.
e.g.
:
N Note
Note
2.
The
e, 6.
vowel
before
"Ijr
double
consonant
is
always
vowels
short.
(
Here
68).
is
and
"^T
Note
3.
An
aspirate
Some MSS.
literally
merely an orthographical
dh
(2',
become ^,
^y
"^^
pada = 2?afa, padaa = y>afaA;a, kudila = ^M/i7a, kudumba =kuiumba, vada = va^a, padhana = 2Ja?/ia??.a. Some dialects had the further change of d to 1. ( 22).
M. kakkola = ^arA;ofa. Mg. ^aala = ^aA;a/a (Saur Mg. yulaka = ;M<a^a (S'aur *jiiclaa).
: :
saada).
(17).
if
{^^
becomes
^).
ruva = r?ipa, diva = d?pa (cf. Diwali), uvari = wpari, uvaarana = wpaifcarana, uvajjhaa = M;)a(i/it/a?/a (cf. Ojha), avi = api, avarat = apara (Hindi aur), tava = <a/>a.
(18).
becomes V.
(W becomes
^).
Aspiration.
( 6).
generallj'^ be-
comes
h.
M. nihasa = ?iiA;asa, M. S'. phaliha = spAafiA-a. ta through tha becomes dha. AMg. vadha = m/a, ta becomes tha, then ha. M. bharaha = 6/iam/a, vasahi = Rarer; p through ph becomes bh. A.Mg. vasati kacchabha = AroccAapa.
n,
m,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
sometimes aspirated.
Aspiration
is
15
sometimes shifted.
S'
M. dihi
duhitd,
M. dhiia
Mg. dhuda =
lost.
through *ghrptum)
sometimes
S'.
found.
(20).
Change
of place of articulation.
S'.
Mg.
ip?i6.id3i
prathama.
This cerebralising
is
Ardhamagadhi AMg. osadha =aMsaiAa (M. S'. osaha). In most dialects n regularly becomes n
naana.
(21). Sibilants.
The
s
by the dental
palatals), asesa
= a^esa,
etc.
(S'aur. etc.
( 16)
kesesu).
55).
often becomes
1.
(^ becomes
^ for ^.
S'.
M. garula
-v/
(S'.
^ila.
= kridd,
khel = v/
krid.
\
(23).
T and d
S'.
sometimes become
or
\,
(rf,
^ become ^ or
o5).
alasi = atosi, M.
^. Yi]i\x[\a.
bijll).
(whence
Hindi
M. Salavahana = Satavahana.
M.
(24).
S'.
doh'dla,
= dohada.
and pronominal compounds tumharisa,
becomes r
in adjectival
In dialects
m sometimes became v.
S'aur.
(T becomes
^).
So
mammadha = mawma^^a.
M.
(from *avanamita).
16
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
This change
is
more frequent
in
Apabhram^a which
at
Thus Apa. kavala = ^ama?a, Jauna = Yamuna, na vahl = waman^j. This nasalisation also appears in M., e.g. Caunda = Saur. Camunda.
or the nasal element.
' '
Kanwar
'
'
from
and
its
(Skt. grama-.
I,
Cf Beames,
1,
254.
in
change
is
exceptional.
(?"
become ^).
in
dalidda ^rfantZra, muhala = m?iMara. The change is more frequent in Ardlia Magadhi than
M.
S'.
M. or
(27).
S'.
Sometimes
vowels.
sibilants
become
h,
especially
after
long
Loc
Sing: tahim
is
= tassiin
in
[tasmin).
The change
important
(28).
commoner
effect
Sometimes instead
inS'.
Sanskrit
we
find
ita.
an aspirate H.
aspi-
dh
etc. in Prakrit,
eg
Mg. idha M.
original sound.
an original sonant
Cf. hanti
\)
29. C.
Final.
All final
are dropped
ah becomes
o,
otherwise vi-
dropped.
Sometimes the
finals
final
vowel
is
then
nasalised.
For
treatment
of
in
compounds
see
Sandhi
(Ch. VII).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKEIT.
17
CHAPTER
$
V.
COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
30.
nh,
e.g.,
nhana = 5wawa,
(a) ami,
'
2.
rah as in mhi=^
(enclitic).
mho mha-smai^
member
of
/
3.
of tlie second
^:il.
In the middle of a
Doubled,
e.g.
kk
kkh),
e.g. lik,
(2)
(3)
^
Mute
nd, or
Aspirated Nasal
' [
'^
are
either
32.
Consequently
most
compound consonants
33. Assimilation.
The
general rule
is
as follows in a scale of
Mutes.
Nasals.
1,
(The
five
vargas
(iii)
s, V,
y,
r, in
order.
h stands by
34.
itself ( 52-54).
Two
mutes. According to the rule given above, k + becomes tt, g + dh becomes ddh, d + g becomes gg and
so on.
Examples, iutta,
dha,
= yukta, vappairaa = w^pa^^'m^a, dud= diigdha, chaccarana = sal + ccra^ia ( 6), khagga = khadga, haAa,kka,ra. = baldtkara, uppala = *<pa/a,
18
INTRODUCTION TO I'RAKRIT.
supta,
= kubja
(6), saddsi
= 6abda,
laiddha.
= labdha.
a mute of another class it becomes anus vara. Sankhala = ^.mHa?a, konca = A-mwwca, kantha, manthara, jambu, but dimmiihsi = dinmiik-ha, pamtipankti, vim^ha. - vindhya (44).
36.
is
assimilated
s&Vdtti
viggha, = vighno,
= sapatni. jugga
Exceptions,
(a) jna becomes mia. anavedi = a/zlo/jayaii. anahinna = anabhijna. j anna - yajna
1. At compound
Note
Note
member
of a
e.g.
manojj a = wffnopa.
2.
Magadhi has
according to Hemachandra
^
(c)
(4-293).
(6)
appa
(cf.
Hindi
i\p).
The other
dialects vary
between
37.
L with a mute is assimilated. vakkala = t;a/A;a?a iphB.ggunB, = phalguna, appa = a/pfl, = te^'pa. [Exception ^/jalp becomes jamp, but kappa also japp]. pavamga = p^aua<7a.
,
38.
Mute and
surd.
Sibilant.
The mute
is
of course
can only be a
assimila-
When
first, it is
ted,
e.g.
When however
first
member
(/w.9.
of
the
first
member
is
sca
f/?/.<-
lln
Magadhi
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIl".
li>
Ska and skha become kkh. 8'. pokkhara = p^<5^ara, sukkha = JMsAra. In this case however the aspiration
is
often omitted.
S'.
M. caiikka,
duskara,
ca,dnkka,
= catusko
ditthi
M.
etc.
S.
dukkara =
nikkam
=
for
tth.
niskram
vesia (cf.
PaU
a.tthi
= (isti,
h&tthi =hasla
(cf.
kaatthaa = M?/as<Aate.
Sometimes this tth
is
cerebralised.
M.
S'.
aitthi
tth.
= asthi.
Saur.
The
M.
fe".
thana
= sthdna
Spa and y
39.
8',
thii or thii).
"ph&liha.
(49).
When
a.r a,
SbCchi
= aksi,
riccha,
= matsara,
apsard,
juguccha -jugupsd.
8'aur.
\
40.
ksatriya,
khitta
,
ksipta,
akkhi =
sifet/o.
aksi,
wtX'sep^mn
(*
'
sikkhida =
dak-
Deccan
").
dialects
\kk\i\x
kkh.
8'.
= iksu,
kukkhi = ^M^s^,
M. pecchai,
Sometimes
S'.
S.
sarikkha = *sddrksya.
"ksdit
becomes ^jh.
paj jharavedi
= *praksardpayati
M.
8'.
khina).
20
[Note.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Pischel distinguishes
:
(a)
original
ksa (Avestan
xsa)
becomes
kkh,
(c)
(6)
becomes ccha,
and
Presum-
Tlie
in '^
identical
'
with
the
Indian
the
relation
in
Iranian languages of
further investigation].
41. In compounds
t + 6
VLsa.vai
or
t + s-
become
s
ss or pajjussua
M. usasa =
= paryutsuka,
ucchvasa.
j
= utsava,
S'.
ussasa.
42.
with a mute
S.
is
assimilated.
S'.
M. kadliia
kadhida = A;ua/7M7a,
pakka /x?A-t;a,
ujjala
Y with
a mute is assimilated. Canakka = CaaA;?/a, sokkha. = saukhya, jogga. = yogya, nattaa = ndiyaka, abbhantara = abhyantara.
denial
is first
44.
palatalised.
S&cca,
%
N
45.
= satya, nevaccha = nepathya, accanta = at.yanto, raccha = ^a<%, ajja = a%a, uvajjhaa = Mparf^yaya, samjha = saw(Z//!/a, majj ha = mad//a.
'
<
with a mute
is
assimilated.
takkemi = tor^ayam?, cakka = caA;ra, magga= //wrr/a, gama = grama, samucchida = samucchriia, uibbandha
nirbandhxi, citta = Ci7;r/, patta = pa//ra, attha = ar//irt bhadda = 6/iac?rrt, samudda = i<tawmrZw, addha orrf/Mi.
/
Exception
atra
becomes attha,
it
tatra
becomes tattha.
it
[When
6r8t.
precedes a dental
sometimes cerebralises
vattadi = vartate].
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
46.
21
:
Two
Tm
Nasals,
is
"^'u
and
^n
before
assimilated to following
"^ n).
Tm
(i.e.,
dimmuha. = dinmukha. M. chammuha = sa/mwMa. ummuha. = unmukha, niiina = wmna, Pajjuima = Pradyumna.
Nasal with sibilant.
anusvara.
If
47.
it
becomes
When
is
becomes h
panha = /jra^wa. Kamhira = Kasmira. 8na becomes nha. VLuhB, = tisria Kanha = Kr8nci. Sma becomes mha. gimha = g'mma. Sna becomes nha. nhana = 5nawa.
f^ma becomes mha.
,
reversed.
Sma
becomes mha.
amhe = asme.
vimhB,B>
= vismaya.
Exceptions
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
S".
= loke).
The semivowel
mleccha,
,
48.
is
assimilated.
my
Sibilant
and semivowel.
3i.Ya,sS3im
The semivowel
M. misa
assimilated.
S'.
a33a
a^va,
= avasyam,
,
S'.
missa = wt^a,
,
'
^^
manussa = 7nanusya S'. parissaadi = parisvajate rahassa rahasya, vaassa = ;ayas?/a, ta,ssab = tasya, sahassa =
22
sa/iasra,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
sahattha =
s?/"a//a5to,
8'.
Sarassadi :=Sarasvati.
saadani
= svdyalam.
this ss
is
Note
1.
Sometimes
reduced to
with
(a)
lengoi
niisa,
dsa above)
is
more
Anisu = a^M,
h.
(64).
s
Note
2.
furtlier dialectic
change
is
becomes
So
Magadhi
this
kamaha,
Apabhrain^a
effect
kamaho.
Later on
had an important
semivowels.
on
inflections.
^ 50.
Two
The stronger
mvi\\3b
h V, r, y. g"allakka = f/aZyar^a,
kavva =
sarva.
kavya,
Exception.
In ry y becomes j, hence it becomes jj, ajja =drya, kajja = ^ar?/o. Sometimes r becomes /, hence
11,
pallattha
= 2>a>"?/asto.
jja^
Note,
yya becomes
except in Magadhi.
p,
ph
is
so
is
visarga before
cadussamudda-cafwAM.
the
8'.
sunivdra, du8saha
= rfwAsaAa
or
(also
dusaha).
is
52.
When h
precedes a nasal
1,
group
inverted.
= madhyahna, M. genhai, S'. goiihadi = grhndli, ciiiha = cihna (M. also cindha) barahana = brnhmana, palhattha = *prahlasta (from ^/hlas = /iras).
avaranha =
apardhva, majjhanha
,
53.
In hy
jj h.
the
semivowel becomes
,
and then
the
group becomes
vibbhala
rh see
(For
fir,
57.)
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
23
I
^
55. Cerebralisation.
Dental
groups
,
sometimes
,
become
ganthi
cerebral.
,
ma,\tia
= mrttikd
vuddhn = vrddJia
(jranthi.
56.
The same
e.g.,
and so
5
57.
Svarabhakti.
bhakti vowel.
When one
of two consonants is
a nasal or a
simple consonants.
The
vowel
times
is
generally
i,
a.
S".
M. raana, Magha,
harsa,
S'.
salaha =
amarisa = amarsa,
kilanta
harisa =
mlana,
tuvara =
duvara
duara
dvara,
suvo = Svah,
ariha = ar/ict,
paiima = paf/ma
(Pali
pa-
duma)
S'.
sumaradi = smora/i.
acaria =
acarya.
slight) xQv\x\\a.
= vaidurya,
Sometimes
(M.
also
appears,
acchera
= caurya
S'.
h'lo
= pa thy ate.
CHAPTER
VOWELS.
VI.
and
Sanskrit
Grammar
In
the old Indian language "^ was not pronounced ri (iT) It was not a consonant plus a as it is nowadays. vowel, but a " sonant " fricative used as a vowel. Its
24
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
pronunciation
may have
own
r in
Srbi, the
name
of the
language.
vowel
consonant
(Sometimes
intelligible
and
after).
r ia
Hence
it
is
more
why
the guna of
ar
(not re),
[b]
Pali
(d)
has
iritvija
for
ftvij,
e
replace
by
or
u as well as by
('sonant'
is
ri.
less
does
Iri
^.
or
This was
syllabic
I)
more
the
final
sound
no vowel
between the
and the
I.
Its
li,
guna
is al.
It is repre-
or a.
Kilitta = ArZpto.
i 60.
^
Substitutes for
ri. (for initial r)
r.
[Magadhi
li.]
riddhi
a^.
= rddhi,
S.
riccha
= rksa,
-
ri<i
rsi.
M. kaa
^^^.
(commonest) kiwina.
drsti,
siaila. = srgdh
,
= grdhra
ditthi
hia.a,
= hrdaya.
u follows).
U. (after labials or
when another
M. nihua
!S'.
nihuda,
= nibhrta, M.
pucchai
S'.
pucchadi
vuttanta= vrttanta.
Note
S'.
The vowel often varies even in the same dialect. 1. dadha or didh a. = drdha. M. iiiatta or nivutta=:7?/-
vrtta.
Note
suffix -ka,
generally have u for r before the Nouns in and when they begin compounds, b" jfimfidua = ;ama/;r^a, bhadusaa = 6/<r(7//-va/rt. But i also oc2.
/
curs:
S'.
bhattidaraa
i,
= bliartrdaraka.
word.
S'.
Note
3.
a,
M. acchaT=
Note
4.
= r5j",
ujju=;/w.
Lona
becomes
or u.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
61. The Diphthongs
ai,
25
Before double
au
are replaced by
e, o.
consonants
S'.
and
edihasia, =aitihasika,
taila, \e]}a,
Eravana = Airavana,
tella
= vaidya.
8'.
M.
komui,
komxxdl
= kaumudl
jovvana = /a%mwa,
somma = saumya.
/^ote.
^
i,
Sometimes in M.'and other dialects ai become and au becomes ail, eg. ya,'ira. = vairin, mauU =
This
is
7nauli.
MagadhL
by
62.
Change
of Quantity.
only one consonant, and therefore every vowel before a double consonant is short This law obviously covers
many
such
cases.
This
is
commoner
or
Maharastri (and
especially in
it
is
in
S'auraseni
Magadhi.
63.
r +
consonant (espe;ya,
m,
va, or
sibilant. S'.kadm]^ = kartum,kMsi.vv = kartavya. AMg. (S'auraseni phasa, = spar ia, AMg, ma.nu8a. = 7nanusya manussa} M. asa = a^ya (S'. assa). M. S'. iisava = Mfsam, diisaha = duhsaha.
nasalised.
dB.msai.na. -^darsana,
(S'.
p hams a = spar^a
(S'.
(49)
M. a,msa = a^ru
65.
assu),
mhi).
of being
is
r, s,
dadha = c?am.sfra, M.
M.
3iha.
pisedi
S'.
= *pinisaii-pinasti,
= simha
(also
simgha
siinha).
26
66. There are a
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
number
:
is
lengthened
sometimes
middle of a compound,
words, e
g.
M.
Ahriccha,
= sadrksa by
cha, jariccha.
67.
Shortening" of vowels.
A vowel
is
is
accented
alia
= aZ^a
or
when the
following vowel
is
(S'majjiira).
Note.
The
difference often
is
often shortened,
the word
was
originally
tella
= /ai7, pemma
= premdn.
Note
I.
double consonants,
Note
2.
8'aurasenl jeva
after a short
vowel
e
e.g. ajjassa
or
after a shortened
6: bhuniie
jjevva = 6//m//amet'fl,
ido
jevva
Sri
= ita
eva.
Siri.
Note
Note
3.
4.
:
becomes
In M. the
final
a of adverbs
is
ened
69.
iixhd = yatJia.
Vowel
for vowel.
i
Examples.
(Coaimonei
also pakka).
a hecoiiicK
in M. than
or Mg.)
S'.
pikka = /)aA-ua
(S'.
M. niajjhinia but
M. kuTma but
S'.
majjhania ^madhyama,
kii(.\iima,
= katania.
INTRODUCTION 10 I'RAKKIT,
[Note.
27
a becomes u
= pralokayati
(com-
moner
(ii)
in
M. AMg. than in
S'd.VY annm
= sarvapia.
a becomes
jdlpamaJi
before
.
the
accent:
i
AMg.
vihatthimitta =
e.
vitastimatra
In this case
generally becomes
metta-
= midtra-.
70.
becomes u
if
=
i
isu.
c
becomes
g"ejjha
before
double
consonant: etthsi
= ittha
= grr%a
e
graliya).
becomes
in idr&a etc., or
remains
S'.
erisa, generally
{Note,
71.
erisa is really
first
dr&,'\
u becomes a in the
n.
ga,r\i^
i.
u becomes
pokkara =
= mudgara, M. gdccha = gMCcAa. u becomes 6 or o before double consonant, or where a compound consonant has been simplified. M. m6lla = raulya, thora from *thorra = 5f^Mra, so tambola = fam-
u
72.
e
bula [tambula
becomes
(i)
end,
S'.
Mittea = Maitreya.
S'.
(iii)
vowel
/3.
o becomes u
for
(i)
before
(
double consonants
M. annunna
annonna
Q\)anyonya.
nouns
in
(ii)
Nom.
Sing, of
e.g. \ou
= lokah,
siliu
28
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
= simhah.
/
V
74.
or
ava<ithita,
of
Kach).
vowels
vi.
pi, after
\y
iti^iter anusvara
S'.
ti,
in
becomes
M.
M.
majjhanna = madhydmdina,
hltd)
Note.
Such omis-
ttion of a word.
.
Samprasarana. The reduction of ya to i and of va to n is more frequent than in Sanskrit. Aya and ava become e and o. S'. tiriccha. = *tiryaksa from tiryak, tuTida. = tvariia, "k&dhedn = kathayatu odSiTa. = avatdra
,
nomai,\iai.
= navamdlikd
from
M.
lona
= /at;a7/a
S'.
bhodi
bhavati.
76. Epenthesis.
pera,i\ta,
-aria
-(trya
sometimes becomes
(but
-erOf
^paryanta,
in
S'.),
M.
M.
acchera = aicarr/a
kera. = kdrya.
S'.
also
accharia as
tumhakera,
amhakera.
[Nole.
From
of
keraka from
RSjas-
kdrya, vide B.
286.
Generally H. ka,
ki, etc.,
thani -ro
keraka.]
-ri,
etc.,
and
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRfT.
29
CHAPTER
SANDHI.
A.
VII.
Consonants.
final
77,
consonants
29)
most
sandhi dis-
final
as
it
AMg
pi
S'.
jad
= yad
asti.
:
Mg. yad
\^c3i,^e
= yad
icchase,
or before
an
enclitic
= sad
m sometimes survives
i}
as in M. ekkam-ekkani
e.g.
= ekaikamfi.
Thus
78.
This form
is
then declined,
ekkam-ekke.
e.g.
aiiga-mesa-
angammi = a%e'n^e,
m-aggI = eso'g'm^.
More
rarely y
d\\\-x
and
\ V
'
AM.g.
%
Skt\:\\\i = dhig
79.
In compounds the
final
consonant of the
to
member
is
usually assimilated
the
initial
consonant of the
second
member
separate words.
= duhsaha
B.
(usually
duasahaor
diisaha).
/
is
Vowels.
:
80. Prakrit
tolerant of hiatus
final
vowel
initial
S'.
of the first
member
is
kilesanala
= ^/e^a/ia?a,
jammantare = /anmaritore
isi
(a
= rdjarsi.
30
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Sometimes however they are not combined. S". puaariha = pujdrha, vasantussava-uvaana = vasantotsavopayana.
81.
If
the second
member
of a
or u
u the
final a or
M.
member is dropped. = gajendraS'. n^trinda. = nare)iclra manda-marud'u vvellida = manda-marutodvellita, mah'usava = wahofsagsbinda.
with long
u followed by a single consonant, the so regularly S', mantharoru combined with a prefix 8'. pekkhadi, M. pecchai, Mg. pcskadi = Hiatus between ! or u and a dissimilar vowel preksate.
t,
vowels
are
remains
82.
paikka for
(ii)
^ixii\kka,
= paddlika
t, i
'
foot-soldier.'
a,
d followed by
sthavira.
M.
pomma
8'.
(also
maiira), M. moha,
(iii)
= may uk ha
M.
(also
mauha).
In compounds.
a,ndhATisi,
= andJMkdrita. D
cammaraa = carma&araA"a. AMg. lohara = /o/mkdra. denla = devakula, Mg. ]au]ix = rdjaknla.
83.
(i)
Na
('*not")
is
often
combined
witli
an
vowel,
natthi
= ndsti, naham = wa
-i-
+ aham
icchafi.
(ii)
(iii)
a after
e,
is
in
Sanskrit.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
31
CHAPTER
84.
VII r.
DECLENSION.
Prakrit declensions differ from those of Sanskrit mainly
through
(a)
above and some others affecting particular inflections, (6) the simplification effected hy transferring words
from one declension to another,
or
is
i.v.
by analogy.
There
methods not found in Sanskrit. There is little that new. On the whole Prakrit Grammar represents the
ratlier tlian
new
one.
lost.
The Dative
is
almost entirely
in the Genitive
tal declension,
The general phonetic rules rule out the consoDanthough some traces of it remain.
of
2.
or u.
3.
i.l,
u,u.
86.
Declension of
Masc
putta = pM^m
32
Plural
:
Nom.
Ace.
Instr.
putta
putte
puttphim
puttanain
"j
puttehi(m)
(various)
Abl.
(puttehim-to)
',
Gen.
Loc.
Note,
(i)
jputtana(in)
puttesu(m).
9,mg.
puttesu(ni)
abl.
puttado puttao,
= *j)utratas.
is
Before
this ablatival
ending
-ias
a short vowel
it
lengthened,
ime, etc.
(iii)
puttehim
instr. plur.
= *pMf7'e6^i^
(as in the
Kgveda)
(29).
(iv)
The form
*'putrasmin.
pronora. declension.
This
is
Nom.
88.
Declension of
Masc.
stems, Normal.
di.ggi=agni, "fire."
:
Singular
Nom.
Ace.
Instr
aggi.
aggii]^-
aggina.
Abl.
Gen.
Loe.
Plural
:
M. aggissa.
aggimmi.
aggio or aggino (M. aggino or aggi).
aggino.
Nom.
Aec.
Instr.
aggihim (M.
agglsu(m).
agglhi).
Gen.
Loc.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Note,
is
(i)
33
aggissa
by
(iii)
Nom.
plural -io
=i
is
as.
(v)
The vowel
cf.
always lengthened
puttehim.
all
The
final
anusvara
is
optionally omitted in
otlier dialects.
these forms by
M. and some
{89.
Neut. dahi
This
is
= c?arf;ii, "curd."
dahim
or dahi.
stems.
Nom.
90.
Ace. Sing,
dahiim.
Thus
Plur.
Ya,\i
Instr.
= vdyu
Nom. vauno
msihvL
Neuter.
= madhu,
'honey,' has
Nom.
Ace. Sing.
mahu(ip).
91.
Plur.
mahuim.
Feminine Declension.
locative smgular have
i,
ii
The instrumental,
fallen
genitive and
together.
Nouns
in a,
Singular:
Ace.
Abl.
devi
devini
vahil, 'bride.'
vahum.
vahiido.
(M. vahiio).
devido
(M. devio)
I.
G. Loc.
malae
male
malahi(m)
devie
devi
vahue.
vahu.
Voc.
Plural:
Nom.
Ace.
vahuo.
vahuhi(m).
Instr.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc.
3
malana(m)
mala8u(in)
devrna(in)
vahiina(m).
devisu(m)
vahusu(m).
34
Note
1.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Abl. Sing,
sion.
2.
3.
Nom.
{10
Plural -ao
=1
*-
ah).
Normal Declensions.
stems,
(i)
Mg.
puliSe.
Nom. Sing, in Mg. and AMg. ends in e. AMg. pur'ise = purusah in Apabhrain^a
;
Nom. Ace.
(ii)
Sing, in u.
AMg. has
devattae
= devatvaya.
AMg. becomes
in a
dii
(iii)
metri causa
rannau = aranydt.
from
-at:
vasa =
grhdt.
is
Common
Rarer
(iv)
in
is
M.
Abl. Sing, in hi
:
mulahi, diirahi.
-himto
hia,ahim-to = hrdaydt.
Ma
ox
ha.
-e
CaludattaS^a or
(v)
Loc. Sing.
together
:
In M. forms in
msi
= 5min
logainsi
= loke.
in -him.
Some
dialects
have Loc.
Mg. pavaha-
nahim = pravahane.
(vi)
Neut. Plur
M. dim
-ai -ai.
Forma
in
dni also
midhuna, jana-
vatta = ydnapdtrdni.
jvii)
Ace
Plur.
Masc
Dialectic
d = dn M. guna
in
qunnn,
A.Mg. asa
= a^van (common
Apa-
bliraini^a.)
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
93.
35
and
(i)
stems.
Abl.Sing.
Examples.
M.\ia,h\ii
= udadheh,AMg.
kar-
kucchlo
mdfjneh.
(ii)
kukseh,
JM.
kammaggino =
Loc. Sing.
is
in
msi: kucchimsi
a,ihi
(iii)
= A;M^saM
in
Apabhram^a
hi:
= adau.
Ay[g.Tisa,o
Nom.
Plural.
AMg. mamsuim-or
(iv)
ina.msn ni
Masculines in
Feminine stems.
(i)
stems.
is
1.
ai.
(ii)
form
in -aa is
but occurs as
(iii)
M.
]6nha,si
= jifotsnaya.
is in
Abl. Sing.
Commonest form
S'.
-a
>
S'.
Mg.
-ado.
-de.
imae maa-tanhiae
= asyd
(iv)
S'.
mrgntrsnikdydh.
in
a: M. reha
= reA;Mfe.
= pS;?/amana
devatdh.
95. I,
stems.
(i)
For
S'.
-le
M. often has
ta.
(ii)
d\tXhiB,
Instr.
= distyd
(iii)
Nom.
96.
stems.
is
Tlie distinction
maintained.
In the
Nom.
in
f)
Nom.
Sanskrit.
or a
now stem
is
made from
;
pii-,
or pia ra-
= pj7r-
bhattu
or
bhattara-
= hharir.
36
97. Agent,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
bhattu = fe^arir Relation.
piu
= pt7f.
M.
piaram.
Singular:
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
bliatta
S'pida, M, pia.
hhdttdram
bhattuna
pidaram,
piduna, M. piuna.
Gen.
Log.
Plural
:
bhattuno
S'.
piduno, M. piuno.
bhattdre
S'.
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
bhattdro
pidaro,
M.
piaro.
piuhini.
Gen.
Loc.
Note.
1.
piunam.
piiisu(m).
bhattaresu
6/iar/r
beeomes
an
i-stem.,
Nom.
bhatta.
2.
Inst, bhattina.
mdtr Nom.
Ace.
Inst.
M. maa.
S*.
Mg. mada.
S'.
M. maaram.
madarani.
maae.
S'.
madae.
mau or maara
to
98.
AN stems.
ting
(
A stems by
omit-
N = middling
compounds), or a new
base.
stem
is
So
Ace.
pemmam
I.
pemmena;
Plur.
Muddha
or
or
muddhaiienam
relic of
AAIg. Instr.
Sinsr. in
muddhena
often the
is
only
sion
The
however
common words
90.
Declension of raa
Singular:
Nom.
Ace.
Ins.
or
i).
raina
(with
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Gen.
Log.
ra n no
37
= rdjnah
or raino.
rae).
(raimmi raammi
T&sim
Voc.
Plural:
= rdjan.
= m/anai^.
(as
if
Nom.
(Ace), raa no
Ins.
raihim
raina).
Gen.
Note.
rainam.
msiha,Ta.o
= mahdrdjak
]ua,VRO
= yuva-
devardjah.
S'.
maharaam
(Ace.),
maharaena
(Ins.),
maharaassa (Gen.),
atta- or appaS'.
( 366).
Mg.
atta.
attanaam = * afmawa^am
appana
attano (Mg. attanaai^a).
in
Gen.
appano
or attano
AMg.
also declines
Nom. appo
the
declension.
New A
Compounds
101.
-IN
stems.
partly
become
stems.
As the
stems in Prakrit
Nom.
= hasti,
(occasionally
has. Ace.
-issa,
Jain Prakrits
it
is
often
-ino.
have Gen. in
otherwise
regularly
102,
-AT
stems.
Stems
manta, vanta.
38
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Examples.
S'.
karentena-A;wr?'a<a,
him = gacchadbhih.
103, Exceptions.
clension,
Ardha-Ma'jjadhi often
e.g.
retains
mahao = mahatah. bhavat and bhagavat. Nom. bhavam bhaavam Ace. bhavantam bhaavantani Ins. M. bhavaa. S' bhavada M. bhaavaa. S'. bhaavada Gen. ,, bhavao. S'. bhavado S'. bhaavado. ,, bhaavao.
knvvAvn = lcurvan,
in
Other dialects do so
104.
Stems in
-S.
Nouns
S.
form stems
in -a
-i
-u.
Examples.
sa joi
= sajyotisam.
There are some traces
of the old declension.
Exceptions.
S'.
(Ace), Puriiravasi
in
common
teyasa,
AMg. JM.
cak-
manasa, sahasa,
khnsa, = caksusd.
105.
= tapasd,
= tejasd,
Pronouns.
pronouns
is
of the first
The following
commonest
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Plural
:
39
Noni.
40
S
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
'Srd
108.
Person,
sa-
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
111. Pronominal adjectives are similarly declined.
41
Examples-
S'.
a,ima,3sim
= anyasmin
kadarassira
= toa-
rasmin, avarassirn
= aparasmtw,
savvanani
anne = ant/an.
sdm.
S'.
ekka (AMg. ega) follows the pronominal declenLog. Sing. S'. ekkassim Mg. ekkas^im sion.
2.
M. ekkammi AMg. egaipsi or egammi. Plur. ekke AMg. ege. do = dvau) duve (from dve Neut. Dual.) also Neuter (by analogy with tinni = ^nwt)) donni
{
dunni.
der.
S'.
donni kumarIo =
(Zi'e
kumaryau.
Ins.
tinni
= <nt, AMg.
ta,o
= trayah
tinction of genders).
Ins. tihim,
Gen. tinh(am)-
Loc. tisu.
4.
cattari
is
the
commonest form.
caiiro
Ins.
panca I. pancahi(m), G. pancanha(m), L. paficasu. cha I. chahirn, G. chanha(m), L. chasu, and so on up to 18.
Nom
e.g.
20
Nom:
irn
visain
visa Ace.
visam I.G.L.
visae
and vTsaim).
i.
or feminines in
declension.
42
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
CHAPTER
IX.
CONJUGATION.
113. The Prakrit Verb has undergone greater changes than
The general phonetic laws have naturally disintegrated the consonantal conjugation, and by forthe Noun.
bidding
final
make
the old
forms ambiguous.
verba to one
type.
with
Apabhram^a period only one conjugation remained, a dwindling number of "irregularities," i.e.
The Dual Number Attnanepada Voice has almost gone; apart from some scattered remnants all the wealth of
Perfects, Imperfects and Aorists has been lost, and
the past tense
is
Thus
of tlie old
system
Present Indicative,
Imperative,
Parti-
Optative,
acid
Future: Active
and Passive:
of
ciples, Infinitive
and Gerund.
Ten classes
normal
(i)
(ii)
axja)
simple verbs.
The
inflections of the
two
{Normal Conjugation)
A -Class.
Singular:
1.
p\icchB.Wi\
= pfcchaini
M. pucchai
2.
3.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Plural:
1.
4S
2.
3.
M.
Singular:
1.
kadhemi
kadhesi
kahemi = kathaydmi
kahesi
2.
3.
kadhedi
kahei
Plural:
1.
2.
kadhemo
kadliedha
kahemo
kaheha
kahenti.
3.
kadhenti
Note
1.
AMg.
Maga-
and
Note
of course puscadi.
2.
1.
ApabhramSa
pucchau,
2. 1.
has
travelled
much
3.
further
Sing.
Plur.
pucchasi or pucchahi,
2.
pucchai.
pucchahu,
is
pucchahu,
pucchu,
,
3.
pucchahi.
From
Plur.
this stage it
e.g.
Hindi.
Sing.
t
2-3.
pucche.
pucche.
2 ,p^. Y^ <^ f
^C
115. Atmanepadam.
In SaurasenI this
is
and
in
in stock expressions.
M. AMg. JM.
2.
The endings
3.
are
jane,
janase,
janae
(S'.
if
it
occurred).
Plur.
3.
janante.
Examples.
M.
S'.
jane,
M.
S'.
lahe
pec-
M. janase, Mg.
,
= icchase M.
,
tlrae
= tiryate
(passive).
Singular
1.
(pucchamu)
puccha, kahehi, pucchasu, kahesu.
S'.
2.
3.
pucchadu
M. pucchau.
44
Plural
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
1.
pucchamha.
S'.
kahemha.
M. pucchaha
(
2.
pucchadba
= Indie.)
2nd
3.
pucchantu.
rule hi
is
kahentu.
in the
Note
1.
By
Sing.
AMg.
add
it to a-
a. AMg. gacchahi (S' gaccha) The ending -su has been explained as a survival the Skt. Atmanepada ending -sva. Pischel ( 467)
it
explained
as a product of analogy
Indie, pucchadi
..Indie,
1st
So also the
:
person
pucchami
is
Imperat.
pucchdmu.
It
is
padam.
kathaya.
karesu^^wrw, anesu = a/iai/a, kadhe8U = As however Pali derives -ssu from sva, and
Parasmaipada stems
107), this
is
(E. Miiller,
its
Grammar,
p.
probably
its
origin,
adoption in the
Note
ing
3.
1st Plur.
to
Pischel
-mha = 5ma is from the Aorist accordwho compares Vedic jesma ( 470),
c.).
Optative.
This
is
common in AMg.
(i)
M, AMg.
Singular
1.
2.
vattejjasi (ahi)
vattejja.
vattSjjaraa.
(''asu).
Plural
'
1.
2.
3.
vattSjjaha
vattejja
3rd Sing.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(ii)
45
derived from
-eyam, -eh
Singular
1,
the
Opt.
of
the
1st
conjugation,
-et.
vatteam
vatte.
2.
3.
Note.
janiydt
its
The short e in -ejja seems to be for ^ ( 72). So becomes AMg. janijja, janejja, but doubtless prevalence is partly due to the influence of the 1st
conjugation.
118. Future,
Singular
(-issa1.
from
-isya-)
2.
3.
pucchissadvM
pucchissamo.
Plural
I.
2.
3.
pucchissadha, M. pucchissaha.
pucchissanti (AMg. pucchihinti).
in ihi arose
Note.
The forms
to
The 3rd
Sing, pucchihii
The
Plural
grammarians give
= 'preksisye)
1st
-ihiha ihittha.
The Prakrit
-;;;
passive either
(i)
corresponds to
S'
(S'.
Mg, Mg.
to
and becoming
i^
(ii)
-la-
commonly
The endings are those of the (A-class) parasmaipada but M. AMg. often have atmanepada endings especially
in the Present Participle.
Examples,
mai, M.
(ii)
(i)
M.
jujjai.
S'.
iujjsidi
= yujyate.
gamiadi.
M. gam-
dijjai, S. dijjadi
-diyate.
S'.
(iii)
From
gacch-
S'.
gacchiadi.
46
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
S'auraseni.
Mdharastri.
Singular
1.
pucchiami
pucchiasi
pucchijjami,
pucchijjasi,
2.
3.
pucchiadi
pucchijjai,
and so on.
120.
and so on.
in Skt.
Causatives.
of
This
is
formed as
by the addition
root,
aya (becomes
e)
hase'i
hasayati.
-paya be-
= ntrmpai/a^t.
pucchavedi.
many
stem,
121.
Participles.
ing
are
shown
in the follow-
scheme
Active.
Present,
pucchanto,
.
F.
pucchanta, N. pucchantani,
causal, puccha\;'ento
.etc.
-ta, -taip.
Future,
Perfect,
pucchissanto,
nil.
common
in
AMg.)
pucchamano -na
pucchissamano
(ni), -nani.
Future,
etc.
Passive
Present.
Future.
vo
Past.
121.
(pucchanio).
M. pucchanijjo.
[kajjo
kdryah]
(137).
S'.
pucchido, M. pucchio
( 124-5).
S'.
Infinitive.
Mg. -dmn. M.
(6)
'iim.
The ending
stem (with
Examples,
added
(a) to
the root,
to the present
S'pucchidum M. pucchium.
S".
gantum,
gacchiduiii, gamiduin,
S'.
kame-
dum = krimayitum,
(For Inf. in -ttae see
dhixridum
= dhdrayitum,
S*.
kadum
136.)
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
122.
47
Gerund.
S'.
pucchia.
S'.
M. pucchitina.
AMg. pucchitta
,
or puc-
chiduna.
S'.
g'adua = gatva.
e.g.
correct.
Examples.
apaniya,
S'.
naia
(for
nltva.)
= *nayiya
(Mg.
but avan!a =
pekkhia,
oda,r\a,
= avatirya
odalia),
bhavia, pavisia,
In Magadhi
Examples,
AMg.
tanara.
123.
prefers
form in
ttd
(to,
after a
:
nasal)
bhavit-
are also
numerous
''
trregular^^ forms.
These
(a) tliose
by both Sanskrit and Prakrit standards. These latter, wluch are not very numerous, may be due to analogy, or to the survival
those that
are
of
forms used
in
124.
large
number
of
differ
Past Partiolder
Passive.
It
was natural
forms
Some words
own
against new
Moreover
width
literal
in
many
of
meaning as an adjective over and above its meaning as a participle. Words, e.g. like snig-
dha, mugdha,
Buddha
48
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
as parts of verbs, though their derivation
is clear.
The degree
to
pre-
were introduced'
and
differ-
would an extensive list of occasional exceptions be of much value. There are however a number of forms of more frequent occurrence, with which the student
should be familiar from the outset
125.
( 125).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
49
khimia
50
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
bhutta
52
126.
INTRODUfTION TO PRAKRIT.
Irregularities in Present Indicative.
are either
(a)
the phonetic
from roots in the 2nd Conjugation, equivawhat Sanskrit would most naturally have had, if they had been included in the 1st Conjugation. Thus we may class as regular such forms as (a) gaction, or (6)
lents of
Irregular
'
forms comprise
(ii)
(i)
class,
;
karedi
(iii)
n original or by
analogy
(vii)
(vi)
other
survivals
of
Skt. conjugation
anomalies.
Sing, in di (S. adi) arises (a)
;
127.
(i)
by
contrac-
(b)
by survival
but also vaai
of
(S.
form
2nd
Tp
class.
M.
va,i
= vnti
{S.
(c)
vaadi),M.
SidihM = pratibhdti
paclihaadi), S.
h\mdi
bhdti,
vihsidi
= vibhdti;
by analogy M.
thM = * sthdtiiov
all
and so with
(
roots ending in a.
Epic dhydti).
bhavati,
nedi =
v^
denti.
Absol. daia.
dedi
128.
from *ddyati,
cf. S.
Fut. daissani.
(ii)
Many
class
(10th class
(distinguish
in Skt.).
Examples. Karedi
= Karoti)
,
from
causal
,
karedi =^*aral/a/^),
,
muncedi (causal
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
129.
(iii)
53
v/
*M
tias
Inf. roviura.
riid.
rodiduin).
y/ dhau.
M.
dhuvaii.
AMg.
v/
Opt.
(also roadi
\
;
^yujyati
130.
(Epic yunjati).
(iv)
From
chid
as the root
come chindai chindadi. This is natural was nasalised in the Sanskrit Present.
Bhin-
The
nasal in rambhai
[^
rabh)
is
derivatives.
(Epic rambhati).
is
regular, but
M. has
also
muasi
= *mucasi.
131. (v)
is
kunai
\
na anadi, kina>i = knndti, gen\ia,di =^grhnati, S. sakkanomi sakkunomi = ^aknomi, dhunai (S. dhoadi, Pali dhovati) by analogy in jinai (8. jaadi) thunai
:
{x/ stu).
132.
(vi) ^/i
esi edi
(M.
ei)
enti: ^ as
is
to
\^
'
be. .mhi
{Note.
used
with
^/ bhl.
(vii)
bhanadi as
nedi. sunadi
= sunedi
as
if
in 9th class,
v/ svap
becomes suv,
lience suai
Imperfect,
bers.
asi
= a5?<
used f or
all
5-1
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Optative.
AMg.
akasi
hojja = 6/m?/a<.
AMg.
d6jja = d?/a/.
AMg.
(cf.
= aHrsl/i
or akdrsit.
Plural
-msw
akariipsu
Perfect.
134.
Irregular Futures.
Futures in -issadi
(or
M.
ihii)
ham kaheham
118).
They
M.
are also
ne\\\\
formed from
but
S.
= nesyati,
From
form the
future.
hokii hossam.
/
sydmi
especially in
M.
AMg
so dacchani
dacchisi,3.s.dacchii 3pl.dacchinti),
S.
daccham and the rest are not used in S. Mg. pekkhissam (M. pgcchissam) rodissam, vedissam. Causatives and others in E- class form Futures (a) as in Sanskrit (omitting intervocal y). S. kadhaissam moavaissasi
yati (b)
= * mocdpayisyasi
omitting aya
niattaissadi
:
= nivartayis-
= vartoyis-
ydmi
i'syati,
su3smssa,m -^u^rusayisydmi.
Mg. mali^SaSi-
mdrayisyasi.
v/ dd has S,
daissam M. dahain,
y/ kr has S.
karissam
M. also kahaiii
J?
135.
Irregular Passives.
(a)
Many
passives
called
irregular
a.s
INTRODUCTION TO PBAKRrT.
-ijjai
S'.
55
passives.
(119.
(i))
e.g.
Other
examples
(&/<ai),
Khippai
(a-
bajjhai (badh:
arabbhai
S. lab-
for u
(S.
(S. rodiadi),
suvvai
{dhu)
(sru)
dhuvvai
{civ.
also
dhunij jai.
adhappaiis a causative
vidhappai.
Tpsissire
^adhapyate, so also
(d)
is
jamma; similar is the case with hammai khammai {,' khan). Anomalous summai {sru), cimmai {\/ ci).
j\^ofg._SaurasenI and
Magadhi often prefer the form from the present base. M. labbhai, S. labbhadi, but also lambhladi M. muccai, S. muncladi; M. suvvai, S. sum;
M. ruvvai.
kirai.
S.
S. rodiadi;
M. bhujjai,
bhunjiadi;
M.
S.
kariadi
(AMg. kajjai =
*karyate);
M.
najjai,
jdniadi;
M.
bhannai,
S.
bhaniadi
The two
Grammarians.
passives civvai jivvai are assigned to ci and ji by the They have been explained as analogous to the forma
u.
from roots in u or
CIV
(=
'
take' or
'
from
{-
'please
').
56
INTRODIUTION" TO PRAKRIT.
(Variations).
136. Infinitives.
Tlie
commonest form
i.e.
especially
in
Sauraseui
is
tliat
mn,
{jnd),
S.
gacchidum, anucitthidum
genhi-
dahidum
(dah),
khividuni
haridum
{hr).
duip,
ted S. ni3ktta.id\im
damaednmdansayitum, (sometimes uncontrac= nivartayitum) or by analogy with A-stems: dharidum, maridum, kadhidum.
,
found
in
Saur
S.
Ihadum
gantuni
padum
(to drink),
kadum kauin
(kr).
(gam).
M. hhottum = bhoktum,
datthuin
JM. pivium, souin {^rotum), jeutn {ji) (AMg. jiniuui), laddhum {labh), vodhum {vah), chettum {chid), bhetturn
{bhid),
naum {jna). Similarly * ghfp-tumior grahitum) ( 19) = *sov-tum for svaptum cf. rottuni = ro^uw).
{muc),
{
'
mottum
v/ vac has M.
vottum
S. vattuni.
as a 2:erund, so
For the
(gam).
This
is
a.*
found
in Vedic.
(cf.
121).
(ii)
From
-tavya, either
(i)
( 4)
or bliavijaiii-
davva, genhidavva.
(ii)
sodavva M. soavva
{iru),
M. kaavva
{kr).
"
' '
''
'
! Al.go
'
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(6)
D,
From
-niya.
M. AMg.
-anijja, S.
From
AMg. vojjha = vahya -ya. kajja ( 50) = karya. from Present stems: gejjha {^10) *grhya from
grhe
and Apa
(Hemacandra)
grhanti).'
CHAPTER
The
rules
X.
CLASSIFICATION OF PRAKRITS.
and examples given in the
last sis chapters deal
mainly with
mentioned incidentally.
The
principal peculiarities
of
some
of
these
may now
be
brought together.
Magadhi.
is
It
is
We
(^ for ^) is an equation that is reflected in the modern languages of the East of India, where people speak, and even write of the "Sham Ved " and " Sheeta." As
for S.
the student
no
diflBculty
bhavissadi
puttassa of puttassa.
and so
on.
or
(^
for T) is
more
' '
striking,
ning of a word,
1
laano =
kings."
jlia,
This is Pischel's derivation. However grahya would become *gajand association with the group gSnhadi ghSttum, etc. might account
,
for the
change of vowel a to
e.
58
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
puliso = S. puriso, galuda = S
garuda,
Caludatta, ovalida-
i8Al}a,
= apavaritaAarira,
I
ia,ma\e
tara.
This change
(
for r is
26)
and
in Pali (taluno
= taruno)
it is
found also
in the
,
Vedic
^w<^
and v^
and
It is however remarkable to find an Aryan dialect without an R sound at all. The modern dialects of Bihar and Bengal have not replaced every r with an I. Perhaps this rule for
dramatic Magadhi
the mouths
is
a conventional exaggeration of a
marked
is
Possibly as Magadhi
it
put
R's.
remains and replaces J (^ for^). yadha = S. jadha (1), yanadi = ?awa^i. yanidavvam = S, janidawam, yanavada = ;/a7iajoa(fa.
ya,y&de
= jayate.
(jh
becomes yh.
yy.
for
Yhsitti
= jhatiti.)
Dy.
rj,
ry. all
become
(^
^).
a,yySi = adya or arya (S. ajja), avayya = avadya, mayya = madya (dhy becomes yyh mayyhanna = majjhanna ayyuna = ar;Mna, ka,jya. = karya (kajja 50).
:
74),
duyyana = durjana.
From
these examples
it is
Magadhi represents
in
The equivalent
of "^
was used
in the North-
West
to express a foreign
sound written Z
in Greek.
So on
spelt
coins of
King Azes we
Words
with the equivalent of ^, are pronounced in some dialects with a sound resembling Z, in zeal or zh in 'azure.'
in Bengali
'
'
similar sound
is
commonly given
ziie.
to
in
many
words,
e.g.
^=r^
pronounced
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Ny, ny. jn. nj become nn.
50
punna = 2)Mwt/a
(S.
(S.
punna
48).
anna = an?/rt.
anna)
ksLunskka.
(S.
= kanyaka.
keeps
sc.
fij).
\3inno
= rajnah
(S.
ranno
99).
a,nnsM = anjaU
= gaccha isciadi = tcc^aft (*icchyate), uScaladi = wcc^alati, puscadi = prcchati. tili^ci peskadi = M. tiricchi pecchai = ^iVyafe preksate.
sonants.
written.
Grammarians
differ as to
MSS.
vsivy
too
much
to
much
help
in
the
matter.
becomes i^kh according to Hemacandra, otherwise we find ^11% i\i&ke = ^uskah, Tuluka = Turu3ka. Sta sth become sta (or ^ta) 5Fg becomes =h^ or ^T2"
Ska.
^P^
Spa, spha become spa, spha, nisphala = w?'sp^a?a (M. S. nipphala, 38).
Ska, skha.
-pabskhalsidi
= praskhalati.
haste or haste
= /^a.stoi^
(M.S.
hattho
38) uv&stida,
= upasthita.
(or it
is
Ksa becomes
ska.
peskadi = preksate
written Ska.
paSka = pa^sa.
jihvamullya).
i.e.
with visarga
The
it
is
real
"^FT
nor
difficult,
.<c
As verbal forms in ccha go back to I.E. forms in -SKA the MagadhI might be regarded as more archaic than the Vedic cch (however pronounced): cf. Slavonic, but this is considered inadmissible as Magadhi
'
'
maccha),
,
cf.
Hindi machli.
etc.
On
the other
hand
if
iechadi etc.
where ^auraseni
had
cch.
60
rth
NTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(or ^t) so t\stsb
becomes
liaste
st.
= tirtha,
Iti
a.3te
= arthah.
This
may be merely
Magadhl
and
conventional analogy,'
.*.
e.g.
Sauraseni hattho:
S. attho:
Mg.
aste.
Nom.
Sing, in
-e.
e liaste
hage =
"I"
(107).
Otherwise
the
follows Sauraseni.
Some
Dialects of
is
Magadhl appear
S'akari
Clay Cart.
Peculiarities.
A
is
weak y before
found
in
palatals.
Yc'isthsi^tisl/ia/
r.
kada = ^T^a
same feature
AMg.).
as a&&a Caludattaha.
= praua-
hane.
Voc. Plur-aho.
{y edxc-asdh)
These
last
three points
resemble Apabhramsa.
bhramsa
stage.
Has both
and
ia.
dialects' of
Magadhl.
Ardha Magadhi.
regarded
it
as an older,
The Indian
all his rules
grammarians called
the
of
Rsi.
'
have exceptions in
'
Arsa.
"Arsa" from
i.e.
his
because
its
meanings
strictly in
accordance with
Namisadhu commenting on Rudrata's Kavyalaiiikara (2-12), derives the word Prakrit from prakrii in the sense of natural
'
On
tlie
change
I.
rt
becomes
.s
is
found
ii\
Iranian.
Avestan niasyo=war<.i/aA.
^
G.I. P.
289.
MSrkandeya gives
this for
Magadhi and
is
Vracada
Apabhrara^n.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
61
created of old
'
Ardhamagadhl is the language of the gods. Arisasiddham devanam Addhamagahd vdnl. Obviously Namivaijane sadhu was a Jain. The Jains indeed supposed that ArdhaMagadhl, the language in which Mahavira preached, was the original language from which all others were derived.' There is some difference between the prose and verse portions Verses often have Nom. Sing, in -o instead of of the Canon.
canon,
the characteristic
-e
(like Mg.),
(like
M.)
122).
Other points
are.
Verse
is
The verse
in the
dialect
thus
somewhat nearer to M. than the prose. Ardha Magadhi agrees with Magadhi
-e,
Nom.
Sing, in
Mg.)
and
(common
in
and sa. In general more archaic features than the dramaAMg. tic Prakrits. AMg. is assigned by the Bharatlya-natya-astra (followed by Sahityadarpana) to servants, Rajputs, and the heads of guilds. The Jain monks in the plays who might be expected to speak AMg. appear to speak ordinary Magadhi.' AMg. differs in many respects from Maharastrl.^ Phonetics. am becomes am before eva and avi = a'pi). iti become i after pluti vowel or in iti vd. prati drops i pad uppanna = prafi/M^pawwa (rare
It differs
ApabhramSa). markedly
in the retention of ra
in other dialects).
Vide Pischel,
16.
Central Asia
Buddhist dramas found in Old Ardha Magadhi. 3 Jacobi considered the language of the Jain Canon to be an older form of Maharastri. Kalpa Sutra, S.B.E. XII. Pischel showed this view
^
One
classed
by Liiders
as
to be untenable.
Pr. Gr.
18.
)x
62
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
dentals for palatals,
teiccha
= cikitsd.
aha = yatha.
use of samdhi consonants
( 78).
Noun
dative in -ttae
( 92),
(
instrumental in sa
locative in -msi
(
104),
v.).
92
Verbs
akkliai,
used as gerunds,
e.g.
136).
Gerunds
in
-tta,
ttanam,
-cca,
-ccana(in),
-yana(ra).
M.
Cerebralisation
is
common
in
The vocabulary
seni.
is
AMg.
differs still
The Owing
rich
when
among
the
the
West
coast,
non-
which
may
it
retains a
in -ittu,
number
AMg,
is
e.g.
infinitive
gerund in
and ga
for ka.
This
t,
The language of the Digambara canon has Nom. Sing, in o Hence it has been called Jain S'auraseni. th become d, dh.
:
It has
is
in either M. or
AMg.
many
of
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
the peculiarities of
fact that
it is
63
is
We
" and
" Mdgadhl
tongue.''''
Maharastri he regarded as an
artificial
literary language,
without any direct relation to the spoken Further study of the Prakrits and
language of Maharastram.
of the
modern
dialects has
shown that
this
view
is
untenable.
Maharastri (and Jain Maharastri) has peculiarities which can be traced in modern Marathi, aad there can be no doubt that this Prakrit was based on the language of the Marathi
country.'^
modern
dialects.
His
classifica-
tion
is
Central Prakrit
Sauraseni.
Outer Prakrits
Intermediate
This
is is
E. Magadhi.
S.
Maharastri.
Ardha Magadhi.
desa, which
the most Sanskritic, and the representative of the Madhyawas the centre of Hindu culture after the early
:
Rigvedic times
1
Grammar of the Gaudian Languages, 1880. Introd., p. xxx. See Introduction to Volume on Marathi in the Linguistic Survey of
India.
3 See Article on Prakrit in Encyclop. Britaonica, 11th edition, and chapter on Language in Imperial Gazetteer of India.
64
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
The speakers
of the dialects
krit
later
some time
of those first-comers
into the Madhyadesa Aryan invasion. The descendants produced the " Outer Band " of languages.
way
Much may be
however
said
based on such
facts,
A weak
position of
Ardha Magadhl.
If this
was centred
in
Oude, one
Magadhl
it
and
If
half S'auraseni.
Now Magadhi
as far as
we know
hardly
differs
we allowed Ardha Magadhi a Nom. Sing, in e, a certain amount of for r, and for s with perhaps some traces of the other phonetic peculiarities of Magadhi, we could invent
1
fit
but
it
would be
Canon.
and the
of the languages
on either side
Ardha Magadlu this does not appear to be the case. It must however be remembered that this classification deals
primarily with the spoken languages on
which the
literary
all
The
literary
Prakrits
were not
contemporary
same time, and so do not represent strictly dialects. Ardha Magadhl is obviously more
Further tho lancuage of even the
influenced by the spreading
is
It
also possible
that later
literary Prakrits
were influenced by
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Pali.
65
was applied
it is
Canon
of the
Hinayana Buddhists.
Thence
canonical books
all
Thence
of
;
again
'
Pali
'
is
sometimes applied to
the
inscriptions
the
official
Middle Indian
Prakrit
'
wideh'
all
understood,^
the inscriptions
and
(c)
including
down
The
to the time
'monumental when
").''^
Pali language of
Nevertheless
it is
important for
(6)
the Old
Prakrit inscriptions.
of classical Pali
available.''
more of the old grammatical system than AMg. The atmanepada is commoner (The Aorist and ImAorists, especially the S-Aorists, abound.
Characteristics of Pali.
Pah
retains
The reduplicated
karoti
Perfect
is
rare,
but occurs.
classes,
e.g
S.
sunadi,
(Atm kubbate) =
is
S.
S. dedi.
:
the sibilant
dental
^,
I,
Mg., n
See
Pali
und
Sanskrit.
"Lena"
dialect for
'monumental
Prakrit,'
and "Lat"
^
widely understood Lena dialect was really Old Ardha Magadhi. See Biography.
66
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
replaced by sonants.
katheti,
Svarabhakti
is
common.
or ariya.
is
From
these examples
it will
more archaic
The geographical basis of Pali has been disputed. The Buddha was supposed by tradition to have preached in Magadhi. The Scriptures were naturally supposed by Southern Buddhists to be in the language of the Buddha. Therefore As a matter of fact it is not. The Pali should be Magadhi. Nom. Sing, in -o, the presence of sa, ra, ja show this clearly. Some regard it as the language of Ujjain, whence Mahinda, the son of ASoka, took the sacred Canon to Ceylon, others as the Aryan language of the Kalinga country.' The latter seems Pali would then represent a very old form the more probable. of Eastern Maharastri in touch with Magadhi on the North. Asoka's Edicts are found in two different scripts, Kharosthi and Brahmi, and in a variety of dialects.^ These often preserve
conjuncts not found in Pali,
e.g.
pr in priya.
conjuncts
still
exist.
Cf.
have in
many
instances to be interpreted
by comparison with
will
be of interest to state
p. liv.
but conaidered tlio " L5t. -dialect " to be on the whole one definite language, perhaps the official language more widely understood than spoken in the North-West
'^
and South.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
()7
some
tical
of the
stage.
Whereas
in the
Old Prakrit stage the typical phonetic and grammacharges are not carried so far as in Dramatic Prakrits,
all
in close
dialects, the
ApabhramtSas occasionally retained very ancient features, that had survived outside the main current of lindevelopment.
guistic
Some
of the
"Outer"
dialects preserve
The following
Prakrits.
Declension.
Sing.
Nom.
Ins.
Ace. puttu
[Neut. phalu]
putte
Abl.
puttahe puttahu.
puttassu puttaho puttaha
putti puttahl
Gen.
Log.
Plur.
Nom.
Ins.
puttahi(m)
Abl.
puttahQ
puttaha
puttahl
it is
Gen.
Loc.
If
apparent that
it
one form for the singular and a nasalised form for the plural
(vide
is
Beames,
II,
42).
Sing, in
seen
In the
Genitive Sing, an
form survives
Apabhramsa.
dialects) or
This
.'?
Nom.
Sing, in o (Rajasthani
is
5 (Stan-
we
get
*a-o.
becomes either
68
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
tlie
appears in
is
In Hindi
it
kis-ka.'^
Sing.
1.
pucchaii
pucchasi or
-hi
Plur
1.
imcchahu
2. 3.
2.
pucchahu
pucchahi.
pucchai
is
3.
This
very close to Old Hindi and not far from the modern
may
Thus to derive Hindi pahla "first" we should start from an Apabhramsa form pahilail rather than from prathamah or padhamo.*
the comparative study of their phonology.""
Pais'aci Prakrit.
Paisaci
lies
The term seems to have been used (a) of the language of demons ' Bhutabhasa," (ft) of a number of uncivilized languages, including some Apabhranisas and some non-aryan languages, (c) the Paisaci dialect of the grammarians (especially Hemacandra) with asubdialect Ciilika PaiSaci (C.P.).
dealt with so far.
is
archaic in character.
Its
chief pecu-
Tamo-
tara
= Damodara.
C.P. nakara
nagara raca
,
raja,
khamma
gharma, kanitappa
=
T,
kandarpa.
na
becomes na
h.
la
becomes 35
fas in
/a
ya remains.
are
not dropped.
Aspirates
not
reduced to
jn,
ny become nn
Who
dialect in
Also in
Roniani
"'
of Gypsies in
Europe, C'oros-kero
t>f
thief."
^
^
tifsa. etc.
M.
cf.
Pischol
44!t
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Brhatkatha
of
69
to
in
story, in Paisacl.
the
the
ilth century.
saritsagara,
maiijari.
Katha-
and Ksemendra a shorter one in the BrhatkathaSome scliolars have concluded that Culika PaisacI
North-West
of India.
was a
dialect of the
it
Sir
George Grierson
connects
Hindu
it is admitted that Gunadhya was a SouthThe Brhatkatha was composed many centuries before that late literary development in Kashmir which produced Ksemendra, Bilhana, Somadeva and Kalhana. '^I na becomes f na, and ^ becomes 55 1 are suggestive of Dravidian influence.
On
Indian,
of
medial
t,
and
of y are
Surd
for sonant
It is
corruption when a The student will relanguage member the Welsh parson Sir Hugh Evans in the Merry Wives Speakers of Gaelic have the same tendency. of Windsor. Any such corrupt dialect on the fringes of Aryan speech would necessarily disappear with the continued extension of Aryan
as well as in the North.
is
common
adopted by an alien
race.'^
speech.
So that
it
The author's theory that these, mostly mixed, dialects should be provided with a separate compartment between the Iranian and
Vol. VIII, 1906.
not convincing.
Nor
is
exceptional
It
is
same change
in
Armenian
(tasn
ten
')
If that is the
meaning
of ciilika, cuhka.
* References.
Grierson's
Monograph,
ff.
pp.
and
2.
Sten
Konow.
Home
of
393-421.
70
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
CHAPTER XL
PRAKRIT LITERATURE.
If
tirst
must be assigned to
its
Pali.
antiquity, but
and
Buddhist
literature.
Of
all
"
a view of Indian
Every student
from the
life
Buddha occur
some comprehenBuddhi.sts, lay and cleric, as revealed by the student cannot really grasp what was
The student
of
History
is
contained in the
of Ceylon.
Mahavamsa
The term
Pali
greater part of the whole of the Prakrit Literature is made up This, as we have seen, is found in three of Jain Literature.
distinct Prakrits.
'
See Bibliography.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
/,
71
Ardha-Magadhi
comprises
4:5
is
S'vetgjubara^ct.
This canon
.
dgamas including
ele ven
Anga.
,,
Ayaranga-suttani
Sii5'a-gadangani
2nd
7th
1st
,,
Upanga.
Ganin in the 5th century a.d. the work is given as 980 years
the Founder of Jainism,
i.e.
The
was
it
Thus the
collection con-
to distinguish them.
B.C.).
are ascribed to
the
of
Eappa-
life
MaEavira.
The
books
is
diffuse, delighting in
elaborate descriptions and endless repetitions. Their chief interest to the general student lies in their incidental references to
facts
and circumstances of the ordinary everyday life in India. The oldest Kdvya work in Jain literature is the PajimaL^cariya, which gives a version of the Ramayana. It dates perhaps
In Jain Maharastri there are non-canonical books of the
:Q
consisting
lives of
mainly
of
collections
of
stories
and narratives of the The Svetamconversion of various people to the Jain religion. bara literature has as yet been only partially explored by
from the
saints,
famous
See Bibh'ography.
72
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
scholars,
modern
for philology
less
and
for
Even
known
are the
Jain S'auraseni.
Bhandarkar
which are
in verse.
is
Jain literature
still
is
in manuscript,
difficult
without
Apart from the Jain Canon the earl}' literary development of Ardhamagadhi has been deduced from its occurrence in certain inscriptions, and in fragments of plays ascribed to Asvaghosa
'
or his contemporaries.
Jain Maharastri
is
found
in the
Kak-^
kuka
inscription.
of
Kavya however
Grammarians.
is
Most famous
dasa.
of the Epics
it
The poem, which is called in Prakrit Ramnavaho or Dakamuhavaho relates the story of Rjima, but is supposed to commemorate the building of a bridge of boats in Srinagar by
,
'
Luders.
A.D. as
this position.
:
Early
inscrip-
tions of
some instances of elision of single intervocal consonants) date from 150 and 200 a.d. Tlie Jain Canon according to tradition was written down in 454 A.u. Its language [AMg.j was influenced by M. [Pisohel denies
this].
^
Macdonell.
Rajatarangini,
lif-ntioii
of Kfilidasa witli
For Pravarasena II see For an attempted identiMntrigupta, sec Stein's note on verse 129.
Bk. Ill, V. 354.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
73
The Gaiidavaho celebrates the conquest of Bengal by Yaovarman of Kanauj about the end of the seventh centur}' A.D. Its author's name was Bappai'raa ( = Vdkpatirdjd) possibly a nom de plume. The same author composed another Epic Maliumahaviaa of which only one or two verses have been
preserved in quotations.
The Ravanavaho and the Gaiidavaho have both been much influenced by Sanskrit models, and dehght in long compounds. The last eight cantos of l^evaa.ca.nAtai' s Dvyd&raya-Mahdkdvyam
form a small Prakrit Epic entitled Kumdrapalacarita describing The the deeds of Kumarapala of Anhilvada in Gujarat.
object of these cantos, as of the whole work,
is
to illustrate
grammar called Siddhaj-Hemacandra. The most important work for tlie study
Sattasai {Sapta&aiakam) of Hala,
prising verses by
of Maharastri is the
This
is
a n_anthQlogv_jcom^
many
of
poets.
much in the distribution of the verses, and probably few can now be definitely assigned to their authors. The collection is evidence of the immense amount of
Maharastri poetry that must have been composed, but not
preserved.
(spelled
Besides Hala
who
is
identified
with Sdtavahana
variously Sahvahana,
etc.)
names
2.
ujjuam jeva
kini
na bhaniadi
amha-
The date
put
it
been determined.
Weber
century.
"Then why
it
Our
little
pussy
's
first-rate
rest."
<4
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
1000 A.D.
Some
Andhra
dynasty (68
a.d.).'
known
in
of
the South
lips of
men
as they
had formerly
is
the
Jaavallaham
It contains
collec-
Svetambara Jain.
some 700
tion.
verses.
Some
of these are
common
to
Hala's
Dramatic Prakrits.
Sanskrit.
of
three
Prakrits
The
authorities
however
as
to the precise
among
its
the roles.
kam
is
The Hero
tional for a
excep-
woman
Nun
in Mala-
timadhavam does so. A purely Prakrit play in which even the Hero speaks Prakrit is also exceptional. A well-known instance
is
the Camphor-cluster.
it
well
to
explain
why no
'
Early
History of India,
'2nd
edition, p.
19<i.
whence
*
liistories of India.
much
weight to
hi.s
"
late;^t
classical'
on the relations between the vernacular language and or .secondary' Sanskrit," i.e. Professor O. Franke's " Pali
'
and Sanskrit,"
jud'jineiit.
1902.
This
is
little historical
INTRODUCTUiN TO PRAKRIT.
reflects,
*
75
"
His
vi hoi
suumaro
II
is
very
smooth
as that
Sauraseni
jester.
is
Mtiharastri
Magadhi
It
is
Sakuntala.
also
MSS. and texts often assign the dialects contrary to the rules of Poetics and the statements of commentators. They also confuse the dialects, so that Magadhi appears almost the same as Saurasenxspoken by Jain monks and small boys.'
This mixture of languages in the Indian
Drama
has been
much
There
Comedy has
Aristophanes
speech of foreigners.
barbarian Triballos,
the Thracian
The
Magadhi
as re-
corded
bj'
Mrcchakatikatn
be useful to students of the Drama. 6akara, his servant Sthavaraka, the shampooer23)
may
Kumbhilaka, Vardharaanaka, the two Candalas and Rohasena. Sitkun, tala Fisherman and two policemen, Sarvadamana Sakuntala's young Prabodhacandrodaya the Carvaka's pupil and the messenger from son.
:
:
Orissa.
Mudraraksasa
servant, Jain
and Samiddharthaka while they appear as Candalas. Lalita-vigralia[Otherwise Turuska raja: the bards and the spy (who also speaks 6.). captives and spy. The Indian spy speakes 6.]. Vemsamhara the Raksasa
:
and
his wife.
Mallikamarutam
:
elephant-keepers.
Nagananda
servants.
Caitanyacandrodaya
:
servants.
Dhurtasamagama barber. Hasyarnava Sadhupirnsaka. Latakainelaka Amrtodaya: Jain Kamsavadha: the Hunchback. Digambara Jain. monk.
76
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
much
to be
made
are
of
it
now.
Shakespeare's
familiar.
common
way on
even
in serious
more or less conventional form, has appeared Moreplays from Shakespeare's time onwards.
vvc
in a dialect
on the Doric
in fact
what
in India
The Indian usage however dififers from all these partial In the first place we may find four, and regulady three, different dialects used in the same household, nay by members of the same family secondl}^ one of these is a learned
parallels.
;
development;
and
finally
>
The systematisation
prising.
of the
is
not
sur-
Everything
else
classified
and
the
'
codified,
faults
of
'
kinds
poetic
making
Brahman
in all ages.
Drama may
:
follow
two
One
namely that
the conversations in the plays represent the actual conditions Grierson writes: " In of Indian life in say the Gupta period.
India there
is
'
of
Comparativo
I'liilology.
014-6.
Almost
every word of these three sections dealing with Greek dialects can be
applied to Indian dialects.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRir.
It is paralleled
77
by the conditions
of
any
at the present day, in which there are people from every part
of India
each of
whom
speaks his
is
under-
what
is
'
Beames suggested a
similar
explanation.'^
Of course
it is
sort of menial
may have been mor#or less true to fact. Again, men could speak Sanskrit and that
is
men
not only their wives but even their grooms in that language.
to speak Sanskrit.
The
^^
a stage convention
Of course
form
drama was
is
Another
must
This
x,
Literary convention.
school of lyric
Kingdom.
are.
more difficult to account for the use for the other dialects along this line.^ The solution of the problem is obviously bound up with the history of the origin and development of
I
^ ^
Grammar,
Vol. I, p.
7.
Le Theatre Indian (1890), p. 331, suggested that the was connected with the development of the Krishna cult at Mathura the capital of the 6urasena countrj'. The use of Magadhi he would regard as a legacy from the ancient Magadhas, the bards of
Sylvain Levi
use of Sauraseni
JIagadha.
INTRODUCTION lO PRAKRIT.
Of this we have
little direct
knowledge.
an original Prakrit
drama
Tlie
later.
of
Kanishka show the use of two or three distinct Prakrits. The Sanskrit is not quite "correct" and Prakrit is sometimes
On the other hand the plays ascribed Bhasa (not yet dated) evidently prior to the Mrcchakatikam are not so rich in Prakrit. One play has none, and some at
used in stage directions.
to
lea8t of these plays are closer in
feeling
and diction
to
the
Mahabharata than to Kalidasa or Bhavabhuti. The extreme antiquity of Bhasa' s plays has been supposed to be supported by the character of his Prakrit, e.g. ayyautta instead of
ajjautta.
This however
is
common
based on
are evi-
MSS.
Prakrit origin has been proposed not only for the Drama,
but also for the Epic and Puranas,* that the Brhatkatha was
composed
in Pai^aci Prakrit
is
{vide p. 69 above).
The evidence
grammar
remem-
translation
from Prakrit.
here.
It should be
all
poetry and
first siglit
;
verse,
hm
for
mh
and hn
for
nh at
cf.
SvapnavSsavadatta the Vidusaka speaks ^auraseni, while the dialect of the ladies and servants contains many forms proper to MaharSstri (or
AMg.).
^
Pargiter.
Griersoii.
p. 253.
Compare
original.
(Hertol.)
Jayadeva's Gitagovinda
(Pischel).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
popular origin, must
definite
litive
79
in-
existed (in
and
was
crystallised
Sanskrit.
If
the
poem be
enough, the
must have been current in Primary Prakrit, not in Middle Indian. Primary Prakrit would not be identical with the "Sanskrit" of Panini but it would bear a strong family
original
resemblance
period,
thereto.
Progressive
Sanskritising
at
later
acting unevenly
on various portions of
of
the
work,
plienomenon we actually
of
Epic Dialect.
Such a sanskritisation
its
Primary
Prakrit
is
very different in
special
section
of Prakrit
Literature
is
formed by the
Prakrit Grammars.
The
oldest authority
is
Chapter
17.
Un-
can be made of
it.
The oldest Prakrit grammar extant is the Prakrtaprakasa of Vararuci Katyayaua, who has been identified with the author of the Vdrttika kdraJ The oldest commentary on the Prdkrtd- prakdsa is the Manorama of JBhamaha. With this commentary the work has been edited and translated by Cowell. (See Bibliography). In Chapter X
on PaiSaci Bhamaha gives two short quotations from the
Brhatkatha.^
lost
Canda
in his
Prakrits (AMg.
deals with M.
The arrangement
is
the
work shows it is comparatively ancient. The most important of the Prakrit grammars
that of
Hemacandra
1
of
Gujarat (1088-1172
32.
a.d.).
Under Sutra
4.
ivasya pivah
\\
hrdayasya hitaakam
Sutra
14.
80
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
the
ffdra of
Kramadi^vara
this follows
Vararuci and
is
of
little
value.
tury) follows
Hemacandra. Mdrkandeya Kavindra who lived in Orissa in the reign of a Muiiundadeva (perhaps 17th century). Prdkrtakalpataru of Ramatarkavagi^a and many others of
Prdkrtasarvasvam of
importance.
Isolated verses in
less
Apabhramsa
occur in Jain
works, in
treatises
on poetics and in
More remarkable is the inclusion by many MSS. Apabhramsa verses in the 4th Act of the VikramorvaSiyam
Vampire.
be recited by King Puriiruvas.'
or
of
tu
Apabhramsa
verses
is
His
PART
S'auraseni.
II.
Extract No.
1.
dia-
Susangada and
Niunia.
Susan
HaddhI haddhi
'
me
sadi?
aacchadi,
{Enter Nipunikd\.
Nipu
ta Java
gadua
bhattinie nivedemi.
Susan: Hala Niunie! Kahim danim vimhaakhittahiaa^ via idha-tthidam mam avadhiria ido adikkamasi?
Nipu
Kadhain
Susangada
Edain"
Hala Susaiigade
sutthu
tae
jaiiidam.''
khu
14.
mama
Kahim
?
vimhaassa
form a
74.
karanam.
=fcamtn
Haddhi
= ha dhik.
'*
Adha
in
loc. sing.
where
"
danim
{ni-\-kfjip).
Heroine Sagarika mentioned giving her maina into SusahgadS's charge, " Saria mae Susahgadae hatthe samappida " (= samarpita) before going
with Queen Vasavadatta to the Love God's grove, where indeed she saw
not the
;s
God but
the liing.
gada
125.
piasahl
(
9, 45, 13.
Capeller has
Esa kkhu
for esa
khu
= khalu
and o
should be so shortened in
*
6. (Pischel, 94).
ido jjSvva
68
(2).
uvaladdho
Java
17, 125.
mae
106.
bhattino 96.
122.
"so."
6
1,29.
gadua, gerund
" So
I will
go and
tell
my
mistress."
vimhaa 47.
sutthu
38.
Skhitta (^^ksip)
125.
hiaa
9, 60.
(v)iva). (t)thida
6 J
{^stha)
125.
janidam
adikkamasi {^ati hram). 125 (i^jila) " you are quite right."
edam
6
12.
82
Ajja
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kila
parigahidaTii
tti
nomaliaip
kusuma-samiddhi-sohidam
devie
iiivediduiii
?
karissadi
pesida
mhi.
patthida
Susan
Nipu
mae
"
Saaria
gahida-8amuggaa-oitta-j)halaa-
Ta gaccha
piasahini.
Aharn
Devisaasani
gamissam.
[Exeunt].
Translation.
Susan: Oh dear, oh dear! Now wherever has Saaria got to {Looking another after thrusting this maina into my hand ? this way. way) Why, hereis Niunia coming
[Enter Nipunika].
Nipu
Well
have received
tell
this
so I
will just
go and
my
mistress.
how
is
this?
me
are
stand-
Nipu
You
quite
right.
the cause of
my
perplexity.
To-day the
ajja 44. Siri 68. pavvadado " from the mountain." 50, 86. Sada 2. dhammia 'righteous' here = " juggler," dhammiassa saasado " from a juggler " (saka.<at). aala = akala. 2 attano 100. gahida (^grah) 125. nomalia 75. 3 " bright with an abundance of flowers " tti 74. pesida mhi 08(1)
+ if). una=' but (piinar in this meaning is treated as an enclitic meaning " again " it becomes puno). patthida (pra-^ \^iftha). 6 annesidum Inf. fr. annesadi {anu-k-\/is). dittha 125 (dr^) samuggaa " box " (aamudga). citta-phalaa " paint" paint brush " {vartika also means " wick." cf. H ing tablet," vattia
(pro
*
'\
'
batti).
T
kaaliharam
for
kaaligharam.
74.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
master learned from a juggler
S'^
named
Siri
Khanda Dasa,
have been sent
bright
it.
and
she
Queen, that he
off to
will
if
make a jasmine
will
embrace
Susan
To hunt
I
Nipu
tablet
So go to your friend.
go
Sauraseni.
Katnavali, Act
II.
Extract No.
2.
with Susaiigata.
[Enter Sagarika with a painting
tablet,
and
evidently in love].
Sa
Hiaa,
pasida pasida.'
Kim
imina'^ aasa-mettaphalaena
dullahajana-ppatthananubandhena? Annamca,
ditthamettena idiso^ sarptavo vattadi puno
vi
Jena jevva
tam jevva
pekkhidum
hiaa.
ahilasasi tti
Adinisarasa^
Jammado^ pahudi
samvaddhidam
imam
janam pariccaia khana-metta-damsanaparicidam'' janam anugacchanto na lajjasil adha va ko tuba doso ? Anangasarapaclanabhidena^
tae
evvam
ajjhavasidatn.
Anangam dava
1
uvalahissam.*'
{Tearfully)
Pasida (pro
-t-
sad).
2
'
imina
idiso
anena.
-mStta
69.
dullaha
'
hard
to attain',
ppatMiaaa
desire' (prarthana).
3 70.
annam
48.
'
samtavo
anguish
(tap),
vattadi
45.
ahilasasi (abhi
laa).
*
5
de
ati
3.
nrsamsa
cf.
'
very
cruel.
12.
Jammado 'from
sacca
birth' pahudi
(pari + iyai).
[vrdh).
pariccaia
7
8
44.
damsana
paclana
49, 64.
20
(cf.
H. ^5It).
reproach
ajjhavasidam
cf. 44.
(adhi
+ ava +
<to)
bhodu
**
cf. 75.
'
uvalahissam
I will
'
(upa + a + labh).
84
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
sumaiilia nijjida-surasuro
'
ua
lajjasi
savvadha
na ko
mama
vi
mittena'^ avassam
tablet)
maranarp uvatthidani.
Ta
jilva
pidara^
taiii
aliiinadain janain
tablet
pekkhia* jadhasamihidani
resolutely fixes
karissani.
{Takes the
and
her atten-
janassa
anno
pekkhissam.
Susan
Edam khu
na
{Enters
and
"^
looks
surprised)
una
esa
garuanuraakhitta-hiaa
se
alihantr
mam
pekkhadi.
Ta Java ditthipadam
and
pariharia niruvaissam.
over her shoulder.
looks
Delightedly)
!
Kadbam
Bhatta alibido
^
Adha va na kamalaarani
mae
vajjia raa-
Sa
{Tearfully) Alibido
-salila
eso.
Kim una
?
nivadanta '"-baha
{Looking up
me
Sahi Susarigade
(mr + /i).
'
bhavia
122.
form
*istrl.
2 3 +
''
dun-nimittarn
pekkhia
uvao.
122.
saddhasa=sad/(-t;asa.
'
6
"^
means'
109.
17. 71.
natthi
'
isn't "
ij
8."5.
'
'her'
'
pariharia.
niiQxaissain
'
I will
investigate
1*
S 17.
(vrj)
I"
kamalaarani mass of lotuses,' a lotus pool, vajjia gerund of vajjed " excepting."
nivadanta
17.
-baha(cf.
(65.*/)//
a) against
(!) 0.'5.
38.
For
-'
tear." appar'
baha
^HS
13).
In the moaning
steam,"
remains bappha
H.
'HHT
'
(Pisch. 305).
INTRODUCTION TO TKAKRIT.
'S5
Susan
ko eso tae
alihido
Sa
'
Bhaavam Anango.
pi
padibhadi
ta
ahani
alihia
Radi-sanadhaip
karissai)!.
Sa
ettha alihida
Susan
Jadiso
ta
tae
Kfimadevo
ahhido, tadisi
kira
mae Radi
alihida
?
annadha-sanibhavini
Sa
Xam^
Ta tadha
janissadi.
karesu'' jadha
Susan
Sahi,
ma
lajja,
ma
lajja.
Translation.
Sa
Be
in
quiet,
my
heart, be quiet.
is
What
is
unattainable
It
is
only results
this,
Another
thing ^What
folly
that
in
him again
ashamed
glance
Nay what
Be
art
fault is
of thine
Thou
didst so
God's arrows.
it so,
God
of
Love
Gods
?
Revered Lord
of the
Flower
Bow
after vanquishing.
and
'
Demons
not
ashamed
to
harry
womenfolk
paiitta
125 {pra-irvrt).
'
^ ^
here "
70.
*
^
= edena.
alavida (5 + iop).
savva
45.
(H. sab.)
nam=nundm.
karesu
116.
avaro
17.
(H. aur).
86
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Utterly illfated that I
am,
this
omen
inevitably
means
beloved
my
death
is
imminent.
is
So while no one
coming,
I will just
gaze at
this
my
heart's content.
my
finger
shake so violently,
I shall
of seeing
him, so
see
him
just as I
draw him.
So
I will
go
in.
Why
vision
her heart
is
so beset with
me
as she draws.
is
!
avoid her
line of
up
to.
What
a
Of course
Sa
my
in falling tears
Sit
down
here
my
Susan
:
Who
is
this
Sa
it is.
Susan
empty.
So
I will
Sa
Why have you drawn mp. there My dear, why are you angry Siisaii
:
without,
of
tell
any reason
Love
So, dis-
me
all
about
it.
Sa
So she
lias
My
Susan
:
dear,
else
nobody
comes
know
of
it.
My
ashamed
of.
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
is
3.
This extract
taken from the Bengal recension edited by A comparison with the usual or " Deva-
nagarl" version
have been taken
will
INTRODUCTION TO PHAKRIT.
87
Yavana women'
the Vidusaka
!
the flowers.
who cannot sleep though worrying about his return to luxury The VidGsaka in the second act of vSakuntala describes his
troubles as
companion to a sportive monarch. Hi manahe,' bho hado mhi, edassa miaa-silassa ^ ranno
'
vaassabhavena nivvinno.
jhandine
vi
Aam
mao,^
aam varaho'
tti
maj-
Aniada-velam^ ca unhonhara
mamsam
bhunjiadi.
Mahante jjeva pacciise- dasTe puttehim saunia-luddhehim kannovaghadina vanagaraana-kolahalena pabodhlami '" ettikenavi " dava pida na vutta jado gandassa uvari vipphodao
**
Hi manahe, an exclamation
assigned
expressing weariness.
Another reading
is
miaa 'hunting.' ranno 99. nivvinno disgusted (nir-i-vid). mao " deer." majjhamdine of. 69. gimhe in summer 47. padava
' '
tree'
*
17.
ahindia
cf.
wander"
ahindaa
= traveller (Mrcch.)
47.
unha -hot"
kadua
bitter.'
s
^
are drunk.'
bhunjiadi Passive
'is eaten.'
:
has rattimmi
even at night.'
Through the night' the other version suidavvam = suvidavvam from suvadi
sleeps.'
'
(= lubdha,
fowler.'
"
'
'ear-splitting.'
i.e.
kanna
cf.
Panjabi
of
kann,
ascetics.
H.
kan.
vana-gam.ina
forest-going,'
of foresters not
-ggahana 'forest-taking'
II
6.
6ttika(M. gttia)e<am<.
vutta
finished'
(y.r.').
vipphodao a pimple
'
8s
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
'
sanivutto. Jena kila amliesum avahlnesum tattha-bhavada maanusarina assama-padam pavitthena^ mama adhannadiie
Sauntala
nama ka
vi
tavasa-kannaa dittha.
'
Tani pekkhia
pi
na karedi.
Edain
cintaantassa
?
mama
pahada,'*
acchisum raani.
^
Ta ka
pekkha-
gadi
mi.
pia-vaassaiii
evam
pi
Translation.
Pf. lieigho
!
am weary
to death of being
companion
to this
a
*
cries
of 'Here's a deer'
is
or
from mountain
streams warm,
bitter,
and with a nasty astringent flavour from Meals at ungodl\' hours, and nothing
it is
im-
possible
to
get
elephants make.
fowlers
wake
all
me
this
And
with
my
now
there's a pimple on
top of the
'
106.
2
The other version has hio yesterday S 58. The anusvara is optional. pavittha (pra + vi.s) adhnnnada 'misfortune,'
' '
'
ij
SaiintaliT. this is
kadhani
kida
mention'
13.
{kathwti).
loc. plur. S 39.
*
'
acchisiim
125,
"
madda
(=
'crushing,'
'
bruising
'
vialo
1
^
rikalo)
'
lame.'
vissamain
Literally
rest' {vi-.sram).
lalieam opt.
(girl),'
117,
(ii)
(Inhh).
'sons of a slave
so frequent in
" whoreson"
"
like
the
mediaev.il
Reading -ggahana.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Highness
in pursuit of a
siglit
'^9
my
misfortune, caught
some hermit
her, not a
From
the
moment he saw
I
returning to town.
was thinking
?
of this
1 will
my eyes.
friend
looks up).
my good
and
when he has
(Steps round
Here he comes
pretend
bow
in
in his heart,
and a garland
of forest flowers
round
his neck.
I
Good,
1 will
my
can't
stand up straight.
leaning on his
staff)
So perhaps
may
get
a rest.
{Stands
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
4.
(Aside) Imain
S'akuntala before the King, who has forgotten her (Act 5).' avatthantaram ^ gade tadise anurae kim v^
sumaravidena.^
vavasissam.
Adha va
atta
danim me sodhanio.*
(Breaks
off)
Bhodu,
(Aloud) Ajjaiitta!
samaa-puvvam
'"
^
.
sambhavia sampadam
akkharehim
paccacakkhiduni
'
cf.
Monier Williams,
p. :203.
=2
Changed
condition.'
?
*
'
to
be sorrowed
5
vavasissam
fut. (vy
-ir
ava
-t
so)
'
I will decide.'
to tell
a secret.'
<>
effort."
Ajjaiitta
"questionable" (sam-\-H).
=sa7nudacaro "address,"
is
i.e.
In the drama
t is
this
juttarn
nama
'
It
is
fitting
forsooth
'
34.
10
sarpbhavia.
The other
verord.'
akkhara
'
syllable.'
\^
'
To
repulse
'
prati + 5
+ calc;).
90
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
The King
Bhodu.
paiittain,
issani.^
is
S'akuntala continues
ta
Paramatthado ^
jai
para-pariggaha-sankina tae
vi
edam
ahinnanena^ kena
'
Primary Rule
'J.
Haddhi haddhi
distress to
anguliaa-sunna''
me
aiigul!
(Turns in
Gauiami).
"
Gautami. JJida" nam de Sakkavadare Saoititthe vandamanae pabbhattham angullaaip. [The King smiles and reflects on female cunning].
S'ak
:
udaam
de kadhaissam."
[The King is still willing to listen]. Xaiu ekkadiasam vedasa-lada-mandavae nalinl-vatta-bhaanagadani'-
udaam tuha
'^
[The King
still listens].
Takkhanani
so
mama
putta-kidao
'*
maa-savao uvatthido.
tti
Tado
1
tae
aam
dflva
padhamam
pivadu
anukampina uva
'^
paramdrthafo
'really.'
jai 6.
!?
I.
pariggaha 'wife.'
pauttam
^
125 {yuj).
'token.'
The name
tava.
would
be
Ahinnann
the
Saiintalam.
+
Pischel read
cf.
in
!?
1900 he
421.
other
reading tuha.
'
Grammar
{apa + nl).
'
<>
devoid of
its ring.'
^
"i
Jada "
ettha
'
my
son."
pabbliattliain
^akravatare Sacitirthe.
here.'
S ^(^
^ 10
= [prabhu-'vam) -ttanani
I;
goes bacU to
-Iranaiii
" kadhaissam
li
I
134.
'
asi 133.
I*
=:tat ksaiiam.
puttakidan
{"iahaka).
'
fostoreliikl."
The compound
'
is
inverted.
maa-s5vao 'fawn'
">
padhamam
20.
u\ac(liaiidido
coaxed
{iipa -^-rhfind).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
cchandido.
91
Na una de
avaricidassa
'
paduni.
panao.'
Paccha tassim jjevva udae mae gahide^ kado tena Etthantare vihasia bhanidam tae. " Saccaip savvo
vi
tumlie arannakao
"
tti.
the
guile
of
women
S'akuntala
is
indignant.
Ko
tana-channa-
says
the King.
This
is
Sutthu.
Puru-vamsassa
hattha-bbhasam uvagada.
{Hides her face in the end of her sari and weeps).
Translation.
S'ak
(Aside)
When
is
there in bringing
myself.
off)
to
mind
Yet
it is
for
me
!
to clear
(Aloud)
My sweet lord
{Breaks
Nay
may now
be questioned.
for thee after
Scion of
the Purus
It is
meet forsooth
union with
me
to
solemn pledge
me, that
am
repulse
me
So be
it.
If in real
am
avaricida
'
stranger'
(a-^- pa7-i
+ ci).
'2
gahida
12.5.
'^
*
*
= vissasadi
'
(vi
+ suas)
cf.
63.
dhamma
48.
vavadesi
pretending' {vi-Yapa-\-dis).
channa "hidden."
'
6 paccaa (= pra^^/af/a). patthara (cf. H. patthar) (pro + .'?<r). ablihasam (= ahhifaiam sometimes written ahhyasam) proximity,' etc.
92
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
hence your attitude, then
a token
I
will
alas
there
is
no ring on
my
finger.
off
Gautami
S'ak
Why,
j-^our
ring
when you
you
in
I
Sakravatara.
will
tell
its
power
the
another thing.
Cane Bower some water lying in a lotus- leaf cup was resting in your hand Then at that moment my fosterling the fawn came up.
One
day then
in
you coaxed
it
gently that
it
should drink
first.
But
it
gained confidence.
said
" Truly,
everything trusts
kin,
and both
of
you are
forest-born."
Caitiff!
science.
You What
look at
all
the
garb of
?
hidden well
in the grass
Verj^ well!
Now am
trust
man
of honey-lips
and a heart
of stone.
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
Act. IV.'
5.
Karpiira-manjari.
in a
is
room
Tlie
in the
up.
Harvard Oriental
Series,
No
4.
An
oxcellont edition
(if
this play
by
Dr. Sten
Konow
L'S
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Sarangika. punjado
{Looking before her)
93
maharao raaragadaKaaligharam anuppavittho. Ta gadua devie vinnavidam*nivedemi. {Approaches) Jaadu jaadu bhattS. Devi vinnavedi jadha saanisamae^ tumhe mae parinaiEsc
'
davva*
Jester
:
tti.
Bhodi
kiin
edam akanda-kumbhanda-padanam
vitthavena'' kadhesu.
Aani
ca
dikkha-vihi-ppavitthae
Devie
vinnatto'"
joisaro
guru-dakkhina-nimittam.
Bhanidain
Tado Devie vinnattam. "Jam adisadi Bhaavam " ti " Atthi ettha Ladadese tena. Puno vi ullavidam
i'^
Candaseno nama
tti.
raa.
Sa devva-nnaehim
tti.
gharini bhavissadi
Tado sa maharaenaparinedavva,'*
of a seat or
maragada
12.
anuppavittho {anji+pra+vii).
2 3
4 Gerundive of causal {pari + n'i), Ht. " you are to be made to marry by me." 5 akanda 'unexpected' kumbhanda 'white gourd.' 62. Lanman renders " shower of water-melons from a clear sky."
6
J
Causal Passive.
'
On
the fourteenth
day
just past.'
pomma
36
'
made
of rubies.'
8
'
dikkha
'consecration'
vihi
'observances'
ppavittha
(pra-\-vi.^)
begun.'
10
vinnatto 'consulted'
'
'
= vijiiapto),
'
joisaro 'sorcerer'
lord
of yoga,
let it
be given.'
gharini
'
(ut
+ lap).
'
13
devvanna soothsayer'
Cakkavatti
wife,
of a
1^
'
Emperor.'
^lust be married.'
94
jenagurussa'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
vi
bhatta
vi
Cakka-
"Jam
pesida.
adisadi
Bhaavain "
vi
vinnavedutu
Guiu-dakkhina
Jester: {Laughing)
dinna.
tarn
sise
Edam
^
!
Kim
"
and
exit).
King.
ti
Jester:
Evam
nedam.*'
Xa hu maa-lanchanam*' antarena
"^
pajjharavedi sehalia-kusum-
Bhaira
lam sa vata-taramule nibbhinnassa^' suranga-duva{Stretches out his hand to her raasa pidhanam Camunda.
:
" Victorious
na niggacc-
Kah,"
etc.
{Enters
and
sits
down) Ajja
vi
gurussa
90.
dinna
125.
vinnavedum
to inform.
\ejjo=t'a2V/*/o
Proverb.
61.
^
44, tthida
'.\B.
125.
27.
*
T
viambhidam
nu+idani.
'
-^ j
rmbh).
takkemi 45.
I''
moon
'
'
(mrga-l').
'
miankamaiii
cans, {pra
moon-gem,' puttalia
40.
.sohalia
*
statue,' pajjharavedi
,<cphalifc5),
'
'
causes to
ooze
I
-^-kitar)
(=
ukkara
'
inviltitude.'
door
57.
INTRODUCTION TO
I'RAKRIT.
95
Karpa
Bhaira
Bhaavam panamiimi
:
'
[Karpura-manjari
down].
Bhaira
Queen.
lani
lani Kappilra-manjarl.
Ta kim iiedam
{To Bhairavd-
nanda) Idaip
Ta genhia*
agamissani.
Bhaira
departing].
himself)
lam
Kappura-manjari-thaiiaiii
padam^ gadua
agantavvara.
sa-tthane cittha.
[Karpuramanjarl does
so].
Queen.
Idamrakkha-gharam'^.
(Enters, looks
around aside).
sariraiii
Sa ka
vi
sarikkha^ dittha.
?
ipra + nam).
:=ucitam.
lahasu
116, note
ii
(?a6/i).
{vi-\-jna).
girl'
(=vatsa)
cf.
H. baca =
vataako.
6
'
'
at a quick pace
20.
'
75.
gadua
122.
sa-tthane
'
in your
own room
'
cf.
7 8
= raksa-grham.
sarikkha
'
like
70.
'
66, 40.
kidisam
96
(In
tti.
the.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
air)
Kini bhanasi
maha
siro-veana
'
(To
herselfj
Ta puno
tahiin gamissam.
lahuni
genhia aacchadha.
down
just
as before].
Queen.
lam Kappura-manjari
?
Bhaira
Krm una
Ghana-sara-manjari-sarauidaini
visumaridaiTii.
Ta puno
gamissaip.
Bhaira
Evani bhodu.
[Queen acts in pantomime as
if
making an
exit],
Bhaira
[Exit Karpura-manjai'i]
Queen
{Pretends
!
to
enter
the
prison-room
seeing
Karpura-
manjari) Sarikkhidae vinadida'' Ae mhi. [Aside) Jhanavimanena nivviggham parisappina tarn anedi joisaro. {Alo^ld) Sahio jam jaiii nivedidara tarn genhia aachadha.
{Pretends
to
return to
Camunda' s
Maharao
shrine
and
sees
Karpura-
manjari)
Abo sarikkhada
vi
Extract No.
Act
Karpiira manjari.
41 and 245-6).
Specimen
of decadent
punning
style
'
siro-veana
'
headache.'
*
^
iivaarana
(a-ni).
upakarana
S 17.
*
^ 8
aharana
'
ornament,' visumaridn
forgotten,'
of.
sumaradi
57.
Imperat. Pass.
"
jhSna
'
meditatioD. magic
'
'without hmdrance' 31). vattadi 45. In such redundant verbs " to be " we have the beginnings of the aado vattadi of. a gaya hai, dinna bhodi later system of auxiliary verbs, cf. divT hai, kido bhodi cf. kivii hai.
5 44.
niv-viggham
less
more or
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
97
Extract No,
Act
6.
7.
Bom-
bay 1902].
Maid: Kadham
Bhodu. Pavisia
padibodhaiasain.
{Steps around).
up and
sleepy].
Maid: Utthedu''
iitthedu Ajjaa!
Pabliadam samvuttam.
jjeva
Vasa
{Waking)
Kadham
ratti
pabhadam samvuttam
Maid
Vasa
Amhanara
Hanje,'*'
eso pabhado.
Maid:
Ajjae,
"
Vasa
Kim
samadisia
''
Maid:
Joehi
'
rattie
tti.
(a)
(o)
out of
spirits,' (6)
having
left
(Lake) Manasa.'
'
'
munala
'
* (a)
{b)
'
uiilana
&
'
57.
Note the
chaa
'
alliteration
"
like a
lamp that
is lit
<>
(a)
colour,
'
b) light.
J
s
Ajjaa
'
my
'
Lady.'
vivujjhadi
'
awakes
(vi
+ budh).
'
utthedu
'
let
her get up
(ut+stha).
Pabhadam
?
'
morning.'
is
What,
it's
night,
how
of
is it
is
morning
Sarnvuttarn
Neuter.
In
masculine.
address by a lady to
her maid.
Judiaro
gambler
11
(dyutakaro).
38.
puppha
joehi
'
karandaa
'
basket,' jinna
old
'
(jf),
ujjana
'
garden.'
12 is
quoted
impossible.
Bombay
edn. radio.
98
INTRODUCTION TO TRAKRIT.
:
Vasa
Hanje,
kahiiii
mae gantavvara
Maid:
Vasa: (Embracing the maid) Sutthu na uijjhaido rattle. Ti"* ajja paccakkham^ pekkliissam. Hanje, kini pavittha
aharn iha abbhantara-cadus-salaaip
?
Maid
Vasa
Na kevalam abbhantara-cadus-salaam.
Avi samtappadi
Samtappissadi.
Savvajaiiassa
vi hiaara pavittha.
:
'
Oarudattassa pariano.
Maid
Vasa
Kada ?
ajjaa gamissadi.
(Persuasively)
Maid Jado
:
Vasa
Haiije,
Mama
bahiniae^
ajjfi
Bhaiiidavvam ca
'Aha.ni Siripi.
tada tumhanain
Ta
Maid
Vasa
:
Gaccha.
:
Na
kuppissadi.
Dliiida 'ajjaiittena
Maid
(Taking
the necklace)
Jam
anavedi.
{Exit
and
re-enter)
pasil-
tumhanam
Na juttam mama
aharana-viseso
[Enter
tti
edani
genhidum.
Ajjauttf
jjeva
mama
janadu bhodl.'
^oith
Radanika
"*
a child].
Rada
I
kilamha.
=nidhyato.
pratyakmrn.
'
cadus-salaam
'
having four
halls.'
Is in distress.'
'
*
f>
raana
jewel
'
'
51.
bahinia
sister.'
'
J s
kuppissadi
*
will
presented
'
it
to you,'
the necklace.
saadia
toycart'
(rfafcattfca).
kilamha
'
let
us play
'
22,
1(>.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Child
:
99
edae
(Mournfully)
?
Radanie
Kim mama
mattaa
saadiae
Rada
navavaharo.
kllissadi.
Tadassa puno
vi
suvanna-saadiae
Ajjaa Vasantasenaae
samivam uvasappissam.*
Vasa
amkida
Rada
Vasa:
Ehi
me
puttaa alinga.
(Sets
him on her
Rada: Xa kevalam
Edina
ajja-
Vasa
eso
roadi.''
Rada: Edina
kilidam.
padivesia-gahavai-daraa-keriae^ suvanna-saadiae
sa nida.
*"
Tado una tarn maggantassa mae iam mattiasaadia kadua dinna. Tado bhanadi " Ra danie, kim mama edae mattia-saadiae. Tam jjeva sovannasaadiara dehi " tti.
:
Vasa
Haddhl haddhl.
Aam
pi
nama
para-sarapattie samta-
ppadi.
Bhaavam Kaanta"'
earth' 55
(cf.
pokkhara-vatta-padida-jala-
'
mattia
'
H.
mitti).
:
is
Rohasena the son of Carudatta but the text here gives him ordinary
Saiu-aseni.
viddhi=rddhi
(upa+srp).
'
58.
*
s
boy.'
97.
6
7
8
pidui^o
roadi
'
weeps,'
cf.
= grhapati),
kerau
Chand Bardai's Old Hindi). maggadi demands,' vSkt. margati (H. malig(in
'
na).
'0
Kaanta
'
Fate.'
pokkhara
38,
71,
'
vatta
'
leaf.
100
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
bindu-sarisehim kilasi
fully)
tumam
'
purisa-bhaadheehim.
kilissasi.
{Tear-
Jada,
ma
,
roda
?
sovaana-saadiae
Child
Radanie ka esa
Vasa
Piduno de guna-nijjida
dasl.
Rada: Jada,
Child
:
Radanie, aliam'^
tumam
?
bhanasi.
Jai
amhanain ajjaa
Vasa
muddhena muhena adikarunam mantesi. {Putting off her jewels and weeping) Esa danim de janani samvutta. Ta genha edam alamkaraani. Sovanna-saad:
Jada,
iam ghadavehi.'"
Child: Avehi.
Na
genhissara.
Rodasi
'
tumam.
Gaccha
karehi
na rodissam.
jewelry)
{Fills
the
with
Jada,
sovannasaadiam.
[Exit Radanika with the child].
There
is
an excellent translation
Harvard
W.
R5-der.
S'auraseni.
Extract No.
8.
Two
of the Jesters'
compounds.
:
(Act
4, p. 114).
maid
sai/s
to
the Jester
Pekkhadu
ajjo
amha-keraani
geha-duaram.
The
Jester looks
Alio salila-sitta-
majjida-kida-haridovalevanassa*
ra-citta-lihida>bhilmi-bhaassa^
roadi 'weeps,'
viviha-suandhi-kusumovaha-
gaana-talaaloana-koduhala-dur-
'
cf.
^
^
aliam
67.
mako
(cf.
H. gharnS ghapana).
levana
6
smearing
'
suandhi
'fragrant.'
uvahara 'oblation-scattering,'
citta-lihida
lit.,
picture painted.'
hhRa=bhaga.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
unnamida-sisassa
'
KH
dolaamantvalambid-Eravana hattha-bbhasamucchida-danti-dantapavana-bal'
maida-mallia-dama-gunalamkidassa ^
toranavabhasidassa''
maha-raanovaraovasohina
'
andolanalalanta-cancal '-aggahatthena
ido ehi
tti
vaharan
torana-
tena
via
mam
sohagga-pataa-nivahenovasohidassa*
pallava-lalama-phatiha-mangala- kalasabhiramohaa
pasassa
''
mahasura-vakkha-tthala-dubbhejja-vajja-nirantara-padibaddhakanaa-kavadassa''
duggada-jana-manorahaasa-karassa'^
'* !
Va-
santasena-bhavana-duarassa sassiriada
tthassa vi janassa baladitthim aaredi.''
1
Jam saccam
majjha-
top.'
^
hanging
'
bbhamaida.
Rather
Comm.
it is
gives
bhramdgata.
'
This should be
of.
S.
-bbhamaada.
bbhama(v)ida
agitated.'
mallia-dama-guna 'festoons
of jasmine.'
3 *
'
'
uvasohida
made
'
brilliant
'
nivahena
'
'
by a
niultitude
'
of
auspicious' pataa
{vi
flags,'
vaharantena,
'
radi
+ a + hr)], uvasohina
brilliant
'
with uvaraa
'
colouring
of
mahay
safflower,'
agga-hatthena
force
'
of the
pavana wind.'
'
sides
(pasa,
44)
charming (abhirama)
with auspicious pitchers (mahgala-kalaSa) made of crystal (phatiha 19, phadiha or phaliha would be better vide Pischel, 206) placed (nikkhitta) on the
(vediS) of the columns (tthambha) altar or balcony supporting (dharana) the gateway (torana), and brilliant (samullasanta)
' '
'
'
with head-ornaments
pSkllava).'
6
'
(lalama)
of
(harida-ciida-
[passa
is
impossible.]
studded
(padibaddha)
beauty, loveliness,'
cf.
-ss-
as
if
the svarahhahti
sakkunodi=:saA;no<i.
'
Edition has
'
baladditthitn
is
which
is
impossible,
bala
is
found
'
in
+ hr), majjhattha.
in-
102
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
'
The
Jester
enters
and
looks
Hi
lii
bho
Idho
vi
padhamo
paotthe
sasi-sankha-munala-sacchahao'^
vinihida-
('unna-mutthi-pandurao'
viviha-raana-padibaddha-kancana-so-
Sot-
Sadahina*' kamalo-
sudha-savannadae.
Aho
Va-
santasena-bhavana-duarassa sassiriada
late into English.
Dr.
"
is
difficult to trans-
Ryder breaks
is
" Yes
9.
it
door
is
a beautiful thing."
Extract No.
Maharastri.
Verse
2.
Hala's Sattasai.
Amiam
paiia-kavvaip
cf.
mutthi
'
sovana
'
'
stairs,' 17.
'
rows of palaces,'
''
{vaidi/ana).
[The English
nijjhnanti
'
sntt\o=)(rotriyo.
niddaati
-'slumbers"
(H.
nid),
duvario
door-
keeper.'
t*
sa-dahina
rice.'
hni
instr.
cf.
tumn
[Rdn.
rayana which
INTEODXJCTION TO PRAKRIT.
103
Amia = amrto.
hium,
'
12.
kavvain50.
ananti,
pad-
to read,*
H. parh.
This
soujp
is
"to
liear."
131.
tatta-tantim.
it
the reading in
which represents
in
by
Weber
In his edition
tattatattira
MSS.
= taptim).
We may
translate
it
on the principles
'
laid
down
in
the KamaSastra.
kaha =
kaham,
Verse
3.
how.'
Satta saaijp
'
Halena
'
vira'iaim
salankarana gahanamn
from among a
K.a,i
The Seven Centuries of embellished verses were arranged crore by Hala devoted to the poets."
= kavi,
vacchala,
95,
i.
39.
'devoted to poets.'
kodia,
'
of
a crore,'
madhya
Verse
4.
ua niccala-nipphamda'^
bhisini-vattammi^ rehai balaa*
nimmala-maragaa-bhaana-paritthia^ samkhasutti
wall
form from the
ua
vedic
'
Lo
! '
Weber explained
'
as a shortened
y/uh,
mark, observe.'
'
'
Pischel conjectured a
bhisi ni
*^u'p
in Trivikrama.
for bisa.
= bisini, S. bisini.
is
.Aspiration of a sonant
rehai,
'
commoner,
6.
vattammi = pdtre,
of
shines
bhaana,
verse
is
platter.'
'mother
pearl.'
This
'
BuVI.
sataim, ivrong.
2 ^ *
5
KM.
nippanda.
pph
is
commoner.
of
patammi.
MSS-
104
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
jjoetics to
vyangya
the suggestive.
" Lo there gleams a crane quite motionless on a lotus leaf, like mother of pearl at the edge of a platter of pure emerald."
Verse
8.
lua-tila-vadi-sariccham
sisirena
kaam
bhisinl-sandam
ii
atta
cf.
Commentators "mother-inin
the household,
for luna) vadi.
etc.
cf.
lua,
'cut'
*luta
garden
''
'
= vatt).
H. bara
{vata + ka-).
Oh mother!
cold has
made
like a
to a lover.
As to her
precise
Some
was
frost-bitten lotuses
would be going and coming to harvest the sesamum. The would be deserted. Another view was.
Verse
13.
andhana-kamma-niunie
ma
jhurasu, ratta-pad^'la-suandham
II
i.e.
'
in love's magic,
'
get hot
(because the
fire
becomes
-aa-, so
dhumsbi = dhumdyate. The denominative -a?/asido,\aa,di = iitaldyati Mg. ciUia d'\ = cirdyati
,
S'.
contracts
to
-a-
'
blazes
'
{pra^jval).
While the
as red
fire
mouth, fragrant
piltalas
KM.
alimani, wrong.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Verse
16.
10^
amaa-maa gaana-sehara
raani-muha-tilaa canda de chivasu
chitto jehi
i
piaamo
pi
mamam
said to
II
amaamaa
cia
consisting of amrit.
'
de
= ^e.
'
chivasu
imperat. of chivai,
touch
via)
'
{^ksif).
(KM. reads
a restrictive
Verse 42.
arambhantassa dhuam
Lacchi
Maranam va
hoi purisassa
ii
dhuam,
Verse 49.
'
certainly' {dhruvam).
Lacclii =Lafesmi.
thoam
pi
na
nisarei
i
majjhanhe ua sarira-tala-lukka
aava-bhaena chahi
vi, ta
ii
thoaiu,
'
a
'
little
'
{stokam).
= nihsaraU)
'
:
majjhanha,
-lukka
'
mid-day,' 52.
ua see
v. 4.
Una
torn loose
or torn out'
(Pischel, 466).
aava 'heat'
^*chayakhi
to
(aspiration,
19).
*chaahi
contracts
{vi
chahi.
(Pischel,
255).
cf.
pahia
'traveller.'
visamasi
+ &ram).
8.
forms from
^kram
nikkamai,
etc., 8.
adikkamasi,
from
At midday the shadow does not move out, even a little way or but clings to the body from fear of the
KM.
Weber
Later he
adopted
ima.
106
Verse 76.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
na
vi
taha viesa-vaso
janei
doggaccam maha
asaTpsiattha- vi muho
santavam
II
'abroad'
(videka).
doggaccam
'poverty'
{dauryaasani-
(yam).
vimuho
(d
sia 'desired'
+ mms).
'
panai
'
jano.
niattanto
returning
(m + vrt).
Verse 81.
avei
'
vi
emea
vi
'
ave
i ii
'
Out
of sight, out of
tempt.'
a.vei=apeti.
'
Verse 94.
pavasanto
gamasann' ummulia-maha-vada-tthana-sariccha
nj
ii
pavasanto (pra +
up.'
vas).
is
vada
'
fig-tree
'
{vata).
ummilia
'
roote
The rendezvous
cancelled.
Verse 107.
f
Gola-ada-tthiam pecchiiina
gaha-vai-suarp halia-sonha
i
= KM. ii.7).
adhatta uttarium
dukh'uttarae paav
le
ii
'
bank
'
'
(tola),
'
of
gaha.
= grhapati).
'
sonha
daughter-in-law,' for
cf.
commoner sunha
adhatta
Pai^aci aunusa
= 57iusa.
she began
adhatta).
+ dhd. caus. fidhavai with pass, adhappai p.p. paavie by a path.' halia ploughman.'
{d
' *
if
he
savvattha disa-muha-pasariehi
15
)
=KM.
ii.
challini
INTRODXJCTION TO PRAKRIT.
challim
(iaa
'
107
'cloud.'
ka-
'
mantle, skin.'
rauai (v/wwc).
vi +
meha
'
sam + qhat
dispersing.'
The end
Verse 128.
{
mahu-masa-maruahaaranne
gai virah'akkharavaddha-
by the
vernal
to
maddening
the
kine.
Verse 171.
(
Gola-nale kacche
= KM.ii. 71).
cakkhanto
raiai
pattaim
On
the
bank
of the
Gola
river,' of.
cf.
107 above,
cakkhanto
raia
pres. p.
Marathi v^cakh.
(markata).
'mustard,' rdjika H.
dai
makkado 'ape'
cf.
uppha'
Weber suggests
'
khokkhei
snarls
word,
pottham 'belly'
den.
-prostJiam
'bench or
connection
stool.'
'crams'
Weber
suggests
with
"On
belly."
black mustard, there leaps the monkey, snarls and stuffs his
Maharastri.
Extract No.
10.
isisi =:l.iadl>^at.
'^
{ava
-^
tarns).
108
{b)
INTRODLCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Grief at S'akuntala's departure.
Ullalia-dabbhakavala maipariccatta-naccana'^mora
'
osaria-pandu-vatta
(c)
'^
laaoll
Act
III.
lias
composed
mama
ca
na ane
'
do not know,'
of.
No.
9, verse 1.
(M.W.
tabei,
i.e.
'
ta,vei
= tapayati).
baliain
(hallyah).
hutta
'facing'
Comm.
abhimukha.'
Derivation
uncertain.
M.W.
reads
vutta = 'yr^to. -ai gen. sing. " Thy heart I know not, cruel one, but day and night does
Love grievously
thee."
(d)
afflict
my
Act V.
Hamsapadika
is
overheard singing.
Ahinava-mahu-loluvo
tumam
kamala-vasai-metta-nivvuo
mahuara
loluvo
'
visario
'si
nam kaham
has
vrt),
'greedy,'
Bengal
version
(nir
loha-bhavio.
cua
mango.'
'
metta
69.
nivvuo
H.
M.W.
is
reads nivvudo
an explanation,
-kavala
'
Ullalia,
deH word
'
(cf.
iiltna, ulalna).
(Pischel'.s edn.
iidgalita
,
p. 191.)
mouthBoeht-
mai doe
'
as-
in Pischol's edn.
'
deer.'
of.
cca.tta.^tyak(a.
'
naccana,
vatta
H. nScna.
mora
peacocks.' Pischel
morl
*
a peahen.'
'
osaria (ava+sr).
Pischel, Bengali
loaf.'
muanti (muc).
version reads
angaim
'
va.
jissuni via.
is
assiini (for
oaur. not
naetre
dialect,
aa.
12.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKIUT.
which
is
109
Saur.
mahuara
'
bee.'
visario
bj'
'
forgotten.'
iii.
M.W. has
by which
visaria,
vimharido.
He
supports this
Vararuci
is
32,
vimhaa,
visaria.
But
-ido
not M.
M. has
sumarida
cf.
(JS. visarida,
JM.
vissariya,
part,
is
dialectic
vimharia),
Hindi bisarna.
The past
active
in
meaning.
(6)
Act VI.
Arihasi
gahiacavassa
houm.
= satydpayati
pa>nca,
'make
'
yuvati.
+ abhy-adhika.
houm
"
;
'
to be.'
M.W.
differs, for
si
be,'
mae
to
jana,
'
cf.
Megh.
8.
pathika-vanitdh.
Oh
mango-sprout, given by
me
to
Kama
of his five,
with contracted
Maharastri.
Extract No.
11.
Mrcchakatikam.
(a)
(Verse 19).
Vicalai neurajualam, chijjanti a mehala mani-kkhaia
keyura,
(khac).
Pkt.
keiira.
(P. 126).
chijjanti,
pass.
(chid).
k\xdbidi
raana51.
(6)
Act
II.
Karnapiiraka (verse
20).
Virajha, 35.
is
sela
= iat7a
[H. P.
which
part,
Pischel,
38.
60].
moavio past
causal
pa-
rivvajao 'mendicant.'
110
(c)
INTRODUCTION TO l^RAKRIT.
Act IV (verse
mother.
sihu-surasava-mattia
30).
at Vasantasena's
eavattham gaa
jai
hi attia,
sihu
'rum'
{sldhu).
sura
'
wine, etc'
asava
'
intoxicating
'
drink
toddy.'
eavattham = e^a + auas^^am. attia 'mother,' vide M.W. Die. sub atta, apparently a non-aryan word, pajjattia sufficiency
'
'
{parydptikd).
make
good meal
for a
thousand
jackals."
Maharastri.
Extract No.
12.
Karpuramaiijari.
(a)
Act
11.
Verse
10.
muhammi
kiiii
ca
tie
ing.'
cut
cut is said to
'
mean
'
'
'
split off'
or
'
grow
throws out
fragrance
cando
tulla
fierce.'
sumaratiiee."
memory
kulla
'
as its refuge."
river-canal.'
= subhaga.
equal
to.'
bJiha
(vide p. 84).
(6)
The Jester's rejoinder. (Verse 11.) Param j6nha nnha, garalasariso candana-raso,
kliaa-kkharo hilro, raani-pavana deha-tavana,
raunair banali,
jalai'
a jala-dda tanu-laa
varittha
jonha 'moonlight.'
wound.'
unha 47.
^5am.
garala
'poison.'
jalai
'
khaa
'
khara
'
alkali,'
-tavanil (top),
blazes.
INTROnUCTION TO PRAKIUT.
jala-dda 'running with water.'
varittha
'
Ill
Verse
25.
vi
Nisagga-cangassa
manusassasohasamummilaibhiisanehirn
hiraehim vihGsane laggai ka vi lacchi.
manina jaccana
vi
nisagga 'nature'
jabi
(ni + srj).
caiiga
" liandsome,"
cf.
Pan-
canga
'
good.'
manlua
for
jaccana,
lacehi laksml.
(Verse 32.)
Rananta-mani-neuram jhana-jhananta-hara-cchadam
kanakkania-kinkini-muhala-mehala-dambaram
vilola-valaavali-jania-manju-sinja-ravam
tinkle.'
'
jhanajhan
'
'
to jingle.'
chada mass-lustre.'
'
kana-kkan
to ring
(kvan).
kinkini 'bell.'
sinja
muhala 'noisy'
'jingle.'
sasi
26 mukhara.
dambara
'
'mass-noise.'
Lanman
describes
this stanza
p. 255.
tour de force
words,"
Even the
(Verse 40),
thus
'
related to
citta
iti.
'
eai
= Saur.
edaim,
'
pavafica
'
dis-
play,' prapanca.
(/)
heart.'
citta-aro
picture- maker.'
Act
III, Verse 2.
savana-paha-nivittha
manasam me
tara
bright.'
pavitthaii
guttha
sucked.' round.'
'strung'
(gumph).
kavalia
'eaten,
anta 'end.'
rahasa 'impetuously.'
{iru). pskha,
valia 'turned
savana'ear'
= patha.
112
(g)
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Verse 31.
The Heroine's
cotuposifcion.
hare-bearer
in
= moon."
all
danta 'ivory.'
bhai
'is
bright'
["appears
its
beauty"],
-mao 'antelope.'
-tulam 'likeness.'
" Bharata-vdkyam.'^
manisi
'
clever, learned.'
fire.'
rittattana 'emptiness
Poverty.'
'
davaggi 'forest
glances.'
Kamala = Laksm!.
katakkha side-long
Maharastri.
Extract No.
13.
paccha
vaai
'
padhamam mahumaso janassa liiaaim kunai mauaim vijjhai kamo laddha-ppasarehim kusuma-banehim.
blows.'
dahina
'
south,'
Cf.
'
Deccan'
kunai
and H. ddhinii
valana
(pal),
riuht.
kankhia 'longed
'
for.'
pia-ana 'lovers,'
'
asamatthao
unable.'
satthao
troop.'
'makes,'
ti)
paccha 38.
vijjhai (vtrfAt/o
35.
unimpeded.'
of sulky temper.
for
many a mango
With pangs
defence.
lits
increast-d
by separation, longing
is
union with
First
mortals'
hearts, then
flowery
arrows unimpeded."
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(fe)
113
Act IV.
The Magician.
calane indassa indaalammi laddhanamassa,
Panamaha
tiase
mahiharo
jale jalano,
panamaha,
for
iraperat,
{pra
+ nam).
jalano
'
calane,
nom.
ace. plur.
Skt
neut.
indrajala
'illusion.'
jasa
'renown.'
aasa
'sky.'
majjhanha
52.
let it
be caused to be given-
demanded.'
" Revere
anattiin (a + ;na).
who takes his name from sorcery, so also those of worthy 8ambara whose renown is well Wliat shall it be? moon on the established by his masic.
the deeds
of
Indra,
or dusk at noon
commauds."
?
jain
jam
liiaena
mahasi sanda-
guru no manta-ppahavena.
(d)
ca-
gaanammi
Bamha,
[There
simplicity,
cf.
is
Siddha-Vijjahara-bahu-satthain ca naccantam.
deve. ace. plur.
52.
very little Maharastri in tliis play. Note its and the great contrast with the decadent Camphor Cluster which uses the same motif of the magician producing
a vision of the Heroine,
b}'
Maharastri
Extract No.
or
14.
Setubandha
Bk.
I.
Ravanavaho.
Verse 57.
How
the
monkeys
crossed
the
mountain
streams.
ghana-sainghae
phuda-phadiha-sila-saiiikula-khaliovari-patthie via
naippavahe
i;
114
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
'
^bol
pass, cross,'
cf.
bolei
'
M. pecchai
padi
khalia
= S'. pekkhadi
ma-sa)iikanta
S*.
-
40.
'reflected.'
S'.
86.
khalida.
patthia=
patthida (pra-stha).
-ppavahe
= pra-
vdhdn.
ol rivers
if
reflect-
trickling through
and run-
as
tlie
monkeys
mountains.
Uttlianghia-duma-nivaha giri-gha'-uvvatta-mucchia-
maha-maccha,
vela-sela-kkhalia
uddham
bhijjanti uahi-jala-kallola.
(ut
utthahghia.
regularly in
Co mm. = uttamhhita
S'.
+ stambh).
This
is
M. uttambia,
uahi 'ocean.'
uttambida.
uvvatta (ud +
vrt).
56.
kkhalia (skhal).
bhijjanti
of trees, with
3.
The sea
subsides.
patta
samkhoh a = samfcso6/ia. vimukka(w + mwc). jhina oasa = ayo^a^a. (a + pra-i-ap) padhama 20.
ccia
'
40.
ap
maiia^
mrduka.
like.'
uppida
'
bursts'.
"The
jets of sea-water
when
Verse
6.
Motta-gl'adanta-kusuinaiii
bhariavattatn
vidduma-milia-kisalaarn
sa-sankha-dhavala-kamalarn
pa-
sammai
salilam.
INTRODCCTION TO PRAKRIT.
motta
witli.'
115
'pearl.'
(ghaf)
'
'being joined
vatta avattain emerald leaf.' maragaa 12. vidduma coral.' pasaramai (pra + iam). (d + vrt). "Quiet grows the water, blossoms united with pearls, the whirlpool filled with fragments of leaves and emeralds, buds
'
'
Weariness
Nala).
of
the
workers
(Sugriva
speaks
to
Khavio vanaraloo duratthia-virala-pavvaam mahi-vedhain na a disai seu-vaho, ma hu namejja guruarn puno Ramadhanuni.
Khavio exhausted {ksap caus. of ksi). pavvaa mountain.' earth.' vedha = vesta enclosure 38, cf, M. vedhia, S'aur. vedhida, Comm. gives the meaning a,s mahi-prstham. disai =
*
' '
mahi
'
'
'
dr^yaie.
-va,ho
= patho.
The Comm. is uncertain whether -dhanum is nom. or ace. may Rama's bow not bend,' (a) Nom. then neuter, {b) Ace. Met not him (i.e. Rama) bend Rama's bow. Comm.
'
suggests naynayata but namejja is not 2nd person plural. " The monkey-people are exhausted, the surface of the earth
has mountains
the
left,
of
'
Bridge
is
not in sight,
heavily again.
Verse 20.
Nala's reply.
dalia
va sambhavana tuham
pariccattam {pari +
ajja
tyaj).
Comm.
va
is
affirmative.
After
one
Comm. would
"
of the earth
may
but
may
be agitated, and
life
despaired
'
of,
Comm.
says samudra-tidanaya,
chastise
the
sea
"
rather
to
chastise the
monkevs.
116
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Sita a vision of
p. 345.
Pecchai a sarahas-oharia-mandalaggahighaa-visama-cchinnani
dura-dhanu-samghiaiicia-sara-punkhaliddha-samahaavarigam,
oharia, past part, (ava + hr).
(abhi
'
mandaldgra scimitar.'
'
aliighaa
+ han).
'
sa,mghiai,hcia,
= samhita
aiicita ^ 65.
sara-punkha
shaft of arrow.'
17.
corner
" Rama-sirara."
"And
ahddha (a + lip) =*aligdha. avamga 'eyeThe object of pecchai comes in verse 69.
Sita saw (a
human head)
off
with a scimitar's stroke, the corners of the eyes darkened by the shaft of the arrow set to the
far
back."
Verse 62.
nivvudha-ruhira-pandura-maiilanta-ccheamasa-pelHa- vi varani
bhajjanta-padia-paharana-kantha-cchea-
dara-lagga-dhara-cunnam,
niv-vvid\iSb {iiirvyudha).
maiilanta
lit.
'budding
'
{muhula)
71.
chea
'
the cut.'
pellia
Comm.
part,
gives the
meaning
'
from bhajjai
is
broken.'
dara
'
cleft.'
its
"The
wound had
thereof"
Verse 63.
niddaa-samdatthahara-miil-ukkhitta-dara-
dittha-dadha-hiram
purenta-
kasana-kantha-ccheaiii
niddaa 'ruthless.'
+
adhara.
ukk-
dadha 'tusk,' 65. samkhaa Comm. = sawhitta (m< yfcMp). slyana 'coagulated' from the rare root styai. Rather from a
past part, sam-styata through *sarnskydta.
'
'
knaa,nii
= krs)m.
tooth of
adamant
lip,
is
neck-wound
is filled
with a
muddy
iilm of blood
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Verse 04.
117
nisiara-kaa-ggahama-nilada-ada-nattha-
bhiudi-bhumaa-bhangam,
galia-ruhir-addha-lahuam anahia-uinmillataraani
n\s\-a.rsi=*niiicara.
Ramasiram
kaaggaha 'hair-seizing'
nidala.
{kaca-).
ania =
S'.
260).
lata,
bhiudi
Comm. =b7irukuH
really
= bhr-kufi,
which
occurs.
AMg.
bhigudi.
(P.
are incorrect.
The forms bhuudi huudi Pischel says anahiaa means 124). bhumaa 'brow.'
a,na,d\h.Sir a,
ahr daya cL
an.Simi\ia.
amilita.
adirgha.
its
it
"The frown
that furrowed
its
Lament.
Verse 75
(p. 350).
jaip
(AMg.
means
eva:
sa-
also cea.
{caiva
ney a, z=7iaiva).
vlhattham = 6t6/ia^sam.
hiam
'
'
endured.'
frightful in its onset the
I
Though
if
terrible,
end of sorrow is not so can view a sight loathsome to women and endure
vision
thy death.'
Sita not
is
The
vlhattham to mean
Verse 7(\
'
a cause of reproach
sainthiam
maha
hiae,
vaha
ko
it
or
has uhnani,
incorrect,
;
mahyam.
ure
loc. of
118
uro
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
breast/
'
mocchihimi.
Fut.
of
muc,
also
moccham.
pass,
thia 12.
paattam = prat;rf<am.
sahasu
'tell'
(nir
imperat. ids.
kammi
loc.
=
it
S'aur.
kassim.
niv-vavijjau
+ vap)
imperat. 'let
be poured out.'
"It was
home, that
breast.
fixed in
I
my
heart from
the
moment
of
leaving
would dissolve
tell
my
Now
my
grief be out-poured
"
?
Verse 77.
virahammi
tumain
tarn esa
tti
dhariam
dacchami
mae
manoraha
and dacchani
is
na piirenti mahatp.
dacchami
Saur.
uses pekkhissam.
kaha
esa
vi
= A:ai/iam
esa
apt, kahaiii
commonef.
So
maham = maha,
= eso.
is
Hemacandra,
rare.
Now
see
my
desires
though bearing
Verse 78.
fruit bring
no satisfaction."
kaha ta maliain
vehavvani.
cia
imam nlsamannain
oblique
will
uatthiani
Puhavl
Earth,'
Saur. Pudhavi,
forms
'ta
in
Ta
are
tat.
common
in
M.
pal
= pa/i7i.
hohii "
'
be."
= Vedic
vehavvam
will
widowhood.'
"Of
fickle
be a Lord.
Royal Fortune
is
with
widowliood on
many me
'
distinguished
men, so
why
falls
absolute
alone?
"
Rama.
Absolute,'
lit.
having nothing
in
common
(witli
Verse 79.
Kim
ea
tti
palattani
visa-ummillehi
loanehi
ditthaiti,
vialia-lajjae
ti
paruniiain.
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKPaT.
earn
visa
ti
119
(Saur.
edam
+
ti) is
;
more usual,
palattam
= *pralaptam.
(pra + rud)
etc.,
meaning visama
vialia (vi
ummilP.
jjast. part,
gal),
phuda
38.
parunnam
Saur. rudida.
"
'
What
is
this
'
cried,
modesty aside
shrieked.
Clearly
it
is
thy face,
Verse 80.
my
lord."
samaam
ettahe
sahihi
va
ti
hottam
jai
vi
jiviam
vuttha,m
= *vyustam
'
dawned.'
of hoi.
dat-
thum =c^ra5/Mm. hottam = hontam pres. part, (Comm, = iddnlm) cf ettio so much ? *ettadrse
,
ettahe
*ettaise *ettahe
of.
Hottam
it
as
companions were
it
my
melt away."
vavasaa-matta-suha-
Verse 81.
Jae
paraloagae
tumammi
daddhavve
liarisa-chane vi
69.
-chane
Comm. sthdne
'festival,'
this
means
'moment'
khana
(Pischel,
322).
"Now
that joy
may
in place of
my
Ten-Headed demon."
120
Verse 82.
INTRODICTION TO PRAKRIT.
Vaham na
rumbhai
dharei
hiaatp.
muham
asabandlio
vi
me
na
ruddhajp.
this is
from
a root *ruhh, analogous to Wbhhai = lihyate from a root *libh (Pischel 266, 507). navari " tliereupon," some say from
cf.
iiavarani
only."
"My
stay
bond
of
it
my what my
and when
restrained."
it is
considered,
not seen by
Verse 83.
maranam
pi
de
padivannam
maha hiaam.
Bolino 'passed.'
from melai
(mil),
maara-hara
vannam
death.
{prati + pad),
akaannua
cf.
savvannu
G9.
"For my
survives."
Thou
my
lord,
and yet
my
ungrateful heart
Verse 84.
Uggahihi
tti
Rama tumam
jano.
mamain
niatti-
kaham.
'
will sing.'
(ni-^-vrl).
kaham
'
story.'
will sing of thee,
" Folk
nature they
will
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Verse 85.
121
kaa,
pal-
maha
hattha.
ukkhaa for ukkhaa destroyed.' nihaa {ni + han). dacchimi nihaa or dacchami have better authority (see v. 77 above), - nighata. vivara = vi + pardn hutta Comm. = mukhd, this has the same meaning, but the form is like AMg. khutta for krtva
'
206)
cf.
AMg. ananta-khutta
'
end-
ess
5519.
times, endless-ly
'
;
k becomes kh becomes h,
cf. iiihasa
palhattha,
(r
Comm. =paryasta
pallattha
lasta
assimilates y and
becomes
palhattha = *praA-
smashed, destroyed and struck down by thy arrow, have gone awry reversed by destiny and come to nought.'-'
Verse 86,
Jam tanuammi
janassa jano.
vi
jha phalam.
tanua
navara,
'
short.'
pema- =premd',
pemma
is
commoner
68.
cf.
navari v. 82
na
dary, is not conclusive. " What a body dreads through love of another, even in a
tiny separation, such a dread result has
come
to pass for to
me
Bk.
XV. Verse
visuddham
14.
Happy
return to Ayodhya.
anu-
raam.
Ghettuna taking
'
'
cf
is
equation
with
yasti
curious.
Saur.
122
also
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
has karidum.
(
this
would be saphalam 5) rather = sai-phalam. " Taking Janaka's daughter, purified in the
of gold,
fire like
a staff
city, to give
good
fruits to
Jain Maharastri.]
Extract No.
15.
Mandiya.
[Jacobi's Selected Stories, No. IX.]
'
Maiulio
nama
tunnao'^ para-davva-hara-
so
ya
eva
janu-desena niccam
baddha-vana-
cakkamanto
vi
tba ya se bhagini
kannagil
citthai.
tassa
bhilmi-gharassa
Vennayada
letter
or
in
Western India.
The
2
strong
y in this section represents the laghuprayalnayakara y not th {vide p. 9) nayara, hence in many modern names -nair, -net.
to
'
implication
of rascality-.
tiirna
a.s
swift goer.'
.
" shows"
s
(pra-^kaii).
For k
duttha
duHa.
meanings
in Sanskrit includ
gives
(for
passage)
'
nightwatchman.'
'beggar'.
'
'
(Probably
slang).
'
laghu-
mrgo (?) and napitah barber.' adda damp (ardra). avaleva ointment (ava + lip). litta 'smeared.' vana 'wound' (vrana). -patta 'bandage' whence pattika modern patti. This context suggests that dutthagando is bahuvrihi ami means one with a bad boil.' Tho trick is still familiar
'
enough.
*
cakivamai
goos in
circles,'
'
'wanders.'
'
pacna
(klam).
Kiliui
gets weary
'
(;5/a)
"quantity."
cf.
-sannihie
'in
tlie
vicin-
ity' (sam-^nidha).
egadesa "portion,"
11.
INTRODUCTION TO TKAKRIT.
majjhe kuvo.
jain ca so coro
'
123
davva-vodharam
anei, tain sa se
kuvae pakkhivai.^
tao so vivajjai.^
ram
ipusantassa.
cora-ggaha tam
jao.^
jao.''
sakkenti genhiuiii
tao
nayare bahu-ravo
bhaniya-vilifinena
tattha ya
Muladevo
raya
puvvatakkara-
kahio ya tassa
paurehitn
vaiyaro, jaha
kassai
takkarassa,
na ya
tirai
kenai
genhium.''
ta
kareu
kirppi uvayani.
vi
tahe so
annam nagar'arakkhiyam
tahe
tbavei, so
Miiladevo sayam nilaMuladevo anajjanto egae sabhae nivanno acchai Java, so Mandiya-coro agantum bhanai Muladevena bhaniyam aham kappadio ko ettha acchai ?
na sakkai coram genliiuni.
padam pauniuna
rettim niggato.**
**
tena
bhannai
ehi,
manusam
karemi.'"
Muladevo
utthio.
su-vahum davva-jayaiu
payatta nayara-
'
-\-
lubh)
form
=^
used as gerund.
nattha
'
'placed'
{-^auca).
(nyasta).
soya
washing'
vivajjaii
"perishes"
{vi->rpad).
j).
*vrtyate
would
(cf.
Pischel, Gr.
202) H. bacna.
Sakkenti.
From
"
6
T
-vihana
-vaiyaro
'
manner
'
story
'
[vyatikara).
tirai pass,
from
tf.
is
accomplished.'
^ ^
pauniuna
'
putting on
'
p.
paunia.
'
is
known
pass.
_rcc/ia<i
Una),
niv&nno
{m+ pad),
acchai
'stays'
60.
Pischel refers to
(Gr
480.
''^
He
'
aganturn gerund.
kappadio
isara
bhannai pass,
of bhanai.
' '
man.
'*'
a + rw/i.
H. cafh-na).
suvahum
subahum.
124
vahiriyam.'
ei.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
sampatta bhumi-gharam.
bhaniya
!
Muladevo purao, coro asimi kaddhiena'^ pitthao coro tarn davvam nihanium ya
nena bhagini
^
:
araddho.
eyassa pahunayassa
paya-soyaiii dehi
tae kuva-tada-
kuve chuhami-tti.^ Java sukumara paya, tae nayam, jah' esa koi anubhuya:
puvv^a-rajjo vihaliy'ango.''
tale
tie
anukampa
jaya.
sannio
nassa-tti
^
ma
marijjihisi-tti.
paccha
nattho nattho-tti.
olaggo
siv'antario
kankamaena asina duha-kaum" padiniyatto gao bhumi-gliaram. tattha vasluna pahayae rayanle tao niggantuna gao
bahim.
antar'avane
teiia
tunnagattaiii
:
karei.
raina
purisehini
saddavio.'^
cintiyam, jalia
so puriso
tehini
nunam na
purisehini
mario,
anio.
bhavissai-tti.
puio asane
nivesavio,''^
su-vahum ca
'
payatta =pravrltah.
lS7=krs)
nihanium
tada
'
*
*
edge.'
chuhai or chiibhai
-'throws."
Heraacahdra = A.->//j
ratlier
from
vihaliya {vihvalita)
'
trembling.'
sannio (samjhitah)
'
made
a sign.'
"
kills."
in
of palayai
'flees.'
volo=bolo a cry'
M.
'
speech
'
cf.
modern bolna.
his)
so-y-a.sim
'sword' or y
is
merely a sandhi
is
con.sonant.
*-lagna.
olaggo
followed
'
ava or apci
'0 ai-sannikittham=a<t-sam-nifc/-.;'(a?n.
squaro
"
(catvara)
Ti-s-
chel.
II
299.
antario
*
'
hidden.'
like a
kankamaa shaped
avana
'
herons
beak.'
dnhS
kiiiun
'
luiving split
{dvidha krtva).
1*
\^
market.'
saddSvio (sahdupitah).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
125
piyam abhasio samlatto: mama bhaginim dehi-tti. tena kaisuvi'^ bhoga ya se sarnpadatta. raina Mandio bhanio davvena kajjam-ti. tena dinesu gaesu
dinna, vivahiya raina.
' :
su-vahuin
sarapujio. annaya ya corassa ativa sakkara sammanam paiinjai.'' eena pagarena savvam davvam davav^io.* bhaginim se pucchai tie bhannati ettiya mceva vittarn. tao puvv'aveiya-lekkhanusarena^ savvam davvam davaveuna Mandio siilae arovio.
davva-jayani
;
dinnam.
raina
puno maggio
puno
vi
dinnam.
tassa
Mandio.
In the town Bernatada there lived a beggar
addicted to taking other people's property.
the beggar's art on
tlie
named Mandio
He
used to practise
show Mouching wearily around with his foot supported on a crutch he wandered at random. And at night he would dig a hole (in a walli and
that he suffered from
a
virulent
sore.
would
bury
it
there.
And
there
lived
his
unmarried
well.
sister.
Anybody the
would have
down
and
of the spring,
And
so he perished.
Thus
The
thief-catchers
it
arose in
Now
re-
lated above.
The
citizens told
thief;
that a
'
sarnpadatta (sam+pra+da).
kaisuvi {katisu
se
'
* 3
+ api).
paunjai
'
sakkara
'
favour."
employs' (pra+yui).
davavio past. part. eaus. da.
'
pagara
^
'
manner' {prakara).
'
list
126
certain thief
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
had been
for
him so
he should
He
also
is
lies
down
incognito in a
Mandio comes and Muladeva said, 'I ani a is it stopping here?' says, 'Who The other said, 'Come I will make a man of 3'ou pilgrim.' A hole was cut in a certain rich man's Muladeva got up
and stays
The
thief
house.
it
He
of
up on Muladeva.
They
set out
for
town.
Muladeva goes
to
comes up behind
They came
loot,
'
;
to the baoli.
to
his
The
thief set
'
work
bury the
and he said
sister,
Wash
wash
she set
him on the
well.
edge
it,
of the well,
to
meaning
to
As
his feet
were very
deUcate she perceived that this was some one who had enjoyed royalty and had sensitive limbs. She took pity on him, and
made
"Flee,
lest
you be
slain."
After that he
fled,
made
his escape.
"He's
close to
he's fled,"
sword and
was very him on the highway, stood hidden behind a lingam in a square. The thief mistook this Siva's lingam for a man, split it in two with his heron-bill sword, and went back to his He stayed there till the night grew light and then he baoli. came out and went abroad. He plays the beggar in the market-place. The king sent men to summon him. He thought to himself, "so that fellow was not killed, and no doubt he
finding
lie
;
Muladeva
will
The king
your
sister.'
Give
me
He gave
her,
her.
Wealtli
her.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
127
'
When
Then again he asked, and again it given. He lavishes the greatest favour and consideration on the thief. In this way he made him give all his wealth. He asks his sister. She said, he had just so much property. Then he caused all this wealth to be given away according to a list previously announced, and Mandio he had impaled.
The was
Jain Maharastri.]
Extract No.
16.
Domuha.
[Jacobi's No. V.]
Sampai Dummuha-cariyam.' atthi ih' eva Bliarahe vase nama puram. tattha Hari-kula-vamsa-sambhavo Jao nama raya, tassa Gunamala nama bhariya. so ya raya annaya atthanatie saha rajja-sirim anuhavanto gamei kalam.
Kampillani
diiena
bhaniyam
lahum
citta-sabhain
namanie kammagarehira
ano-vva
teyasa
jalanto
sittho^ Jaya-raino.
pancama-dine savva-rayanamao
dittho
vi
maha-maudo,
piiiya
sa-harisehim
tena
parituttha-manenam nandl-ravathavai-m-aino''
puvvayam
uttario
bhumi-vivarao.
jaha'riha-vattha-m-aihim.
theva-kalena^ vi
nimmaya
'
uttunga-
'
(samprati).
Dummuha=Do-muha
dQo
'
two-faces.'
audience hall'
'
{a-\-stha).
envoy.'
'
commanded
'
(a+jfia)
125.
thavai
architect
'
(sthapati).
samadhatta begun' past pass. part. {sam-\-a-dha) for dha becomes dha, compare 7. The derivation from arabdha is quite impossible. 6 dharanie kammagara during the excavations.' khannamanie
'
'
workman,'
6
1
i
cf.
Asoga.
(b'ista
sittho
told' p. p. p. of sahai
'
*sasati)
125.
thavai-m-aino
-m-
is
a sandhi consonant.
theva
'little' (Pali
theva) ^stip
'
drop.'
128
sihara
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
citta-sabha.
sohana-dine
kao
citta-sabliae
paveso.
Arovio
mansfala-tura-saddena'
appano
uttim'ange
maudo.
naraaiii kayani.
tassa
duhiya
Gunamala addhiim' karei. Mayana'bhihanassa jakkhassa icchai uvaiyaip.* annaya ya pariyaya-manjariuvalambha-suvina-suiya tise duhiya jaya. kayam ca vaddhavanayam.* dinnam jakkhassa uvaiyatp. kayani ca tie namain Mayanamanjarl. kamena ya jaya jovvan'attha.
me
n'atthi-tti
io
3'a
Ujjeiile
Candapajjoya-raya.
jao.
jaha: raya
domuho
Pajjoena bhaniyam
atthi
;
bhaniyam
havanti.
tassa eriso
maudo
maudass' uvarim
:
Pajjoyassa
lobho
jao.
duj'ani
Domuha-raino pesei
aha na
eyam mauda-rayanam mama pesehi Domuha-raina duo bhanio Pajjoya-santio jai mama jam maggiyam deha, to aham avi maudam demi. duena. bhaniyam: kim maggaha? raina
^
bhaniyam
ya
Lohajangho ya
il
pacligao duo Ujjenini. sae5''am Pajjoyassa rajja-siram. hiyam Pajjoyassa Domuha-santiyaiii padivayanam. kuddho^ donni lakkhii mayagaaiva Pajjoo, calio caurariga-balena lanam," donni sahassa rahanam, panca ajuyani hayanam,
:
tura
musical instrument.'
'
* ^
loena
by the people
'
0.
{adhrti.)
icchai
'promises.'
uvaiyam
'offering'
suiya 'revealed'
{sue).
Satir.
suida.
'
suvina 'dream.'
l)irth
pHriyaya=
parijata
6
? 8
" coral
'
tree."
vaddhavanayam
leremonj-
"
i^ardhapana.
pesei
he sends.'
*
jujjha-sajjo
"
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
satta koflio payai
'
2i)
jananam.
Pancala-janavaya-sandhim.
Domuha-raya cauranga
Pajjoena,
vi
bala-samaggo
assa.
''
nihario nayarao.
Paficala-visaya-sandhie
sagara-vuho Domuhena.
jujjhain.
so
mauda-rayana-pahavena
ajeo
Domuharaya.
bhaggam*'
nayaram.
-rairio
Pajjoyassa balam. bandhiuna Pajjoo pavesio dinnam calane kadayam.'^ suhena tattha Pajjoya-
vaccai kalo.
jao gadha'nurao.
tao
dajjhamanassa
cinta-samtava-gayassa
dittho
voliya*
parimilana-
muha-sariro Domuha-raina
puochio sarira-pauttim,
tao
na dei
padivayanam.
nisasiuna
diham
jampiyam
Pajjoena
Mayana-vasa-gasaa, nara-vara
kuviyassa marantassa ya
ta jai icchasi
vahi-vighatthassa
'
taha
ya
mattassa
lajja
durujjhiya hoi
'
ti
'
[eyam
kusalam
'^
payaccha to JVlayanamanjarim
niya-dhuyam
tao
me
nara-vara
II
hutte
payai
'
footsoldier
'
'
(padati).
anavaraya
incessant.'
samaggo
ajeo
'
'
complete.'
*
'
v&io=zracito.
vuha
'
invincible.'
'
bhaggam
'
broken.'
'
'7
voliya 'passed,'
{jalpitam)
*
cf.
bolei.
y '0
'I
sighing.'
'
jampiyam
'
37.
(vi
vahi
'
illness
'
(vyadhi).
vighattha
consumed'
behind.'
+ ghas).
kuvia
angry.'
dur-ujjhiya
left far
'2
*dhukta (Pischel,
'3
65).
'
dhario
'
waited
{dhr).
130
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
'
annaya agao Inda-mahusavo. Domuha-raina aittha nayara-jana: ubbheha indakeum ' tao mangala-nandi-maharavena dhavala-dhaya-vadaho doya-khiukliinl-jala'lamkio^ avalam
!
ubbhio indakeu.
tao nac-
sukai-raiya
kavva-bandha, naccanti
indayalfiiip,
in-
nara-samghaya,
dayalino''
disanti
ditthi-raohanaim
;
ya
dijjanti
tamboraira
khippanti
kappura-kun-
kuma-jala-chada,
aojjaim.^
dijjanti
evara
raaha-moena
punnima.
meinle.
puio maha-vicchaddena
kusuma-vatth'alhiip Do-
muha-raina indakeu.
maha-tiira-ravena
pariluppamano
datthiina cintiyam
reha-vva cancalanara parinama-virasanam riddhinam. eyain cintayanto saqabuddho, patteyabuddho " jao. paiica-rautthiyara loyam kaiina pavvaio."^
uktam ca
'
aittha
'
commanded
'
{a-^-dis).
ubbheha 'erect' imperat. from ubbhei 'erects' from ubbha = urdhva (also uddha uddha). For dhv becomes bbh compare dv l>ecomes bb. barasa twelve '^(dvadasa). -keum banner.' 3 dhaya=dftva;'Gt. vadaho {-pataka). doya " daruhasta" 'clapper.'
2
* '
':
*
f"
cincaio
gijjanti
'
are sung'
'
135.
6
T
indayalino
magicians.'
'
throws
'
vajjanti
"are sounded"
(vadyante).
araejjha
'
being
destroyed.'
'0
'I
all
patteya-buddho=pratyeka-buddho one who obtains enlightenment By analogy with pacciisa, etc., one might expect *pa(oeya (cf. alone.
Pischel
Pali pacceko).
'*
= " pra(Civ. 28 1 ) explains patte^a in this phrase, patteyam tyekam") and patti in M. pattiaT AMg. pattij'ai 6. IMg. pattiaadi = " pratiyaW as being derived not from prati but from *parn'i *parti, and compares Greek porti beside the ordinary proti. mutthiya handful.' pavvaio lie entered the Order {pra-^vraj).
(
' *
'
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKKIT.
jo
)31
luppamanaip
riddhim ariddhiin samupehiyanani Pancala-raya
vi saraik-
kha
'
dhammatn
Domuha.
[Now comes
In
this land of
Bharata there
town
called
Kampilla.
His
And
One day
in the
pavilion
of the
"What
do
I lack,
that
The envoy said, " Your Highness has no other kings have? " picture-gallery." Then the raja commanded his architects, They started work saying, Quickly build a picture-gallery.' immediately on the command. While the excavations for this work were going on, the workmen found on the fifth day a
'
great diadem of
fire,
all
sorts of
gems
and
Raja Jaya.
He was
rest
The
architects
and the
like.
In a very
On an
auspicious day
To
and so shone with the light of a double countenance. So the people dubbed him " Double- face." Some time passed, and there were born to the raja seven sons. Gunamala grieved that she had no daughter, and
his head,
promised an offering to a
And then
per-
The
birth
of conceiving
samuppe
17.
to
44.
scan.
in
niryukti
samikkhai which is regularly contracted AMg. verse to samikkhe, but this would not scan here.
for
132
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
They named
Mayana
maid's estate.
Now
that
iiing
Candra-Pradyota
of Ujjain
had become double-faced. "How?" asked Pradyota. The envoy said, "He has such a diadem, on Pradyota was filled with putting it on he has two faces."
the
raja
He
sent a messenger to
!
" Send
me
If
King Domuha said to Pradyota's messenger, The 'If you give me what I ask, I will give the diadem." messenger said, "What are you asking? " The raja said,
" Give
me there's
Queen
S'iva,
LohaS^ahgho."
This was the cream of Pradyota's kingdom.
returned to Ujjain, and told
Pradyota
arms
two lakhs
of elephants,
He
King Domuha on the other side came out of the city with all his army, and went to meet Pradyota. On the Paiicala frontier Pradyota took up the " Garuda " formation, and Doubleface the " Ocean " order. Then both forces joined issue. Through the puissance of that jewel of a diadem Doubleface was invincible. Pradyota's force was broken. Pradyota was bound and
brought into the
city.
ring
was
And
en-
He became deeply
fire
of
love,
and
fallen
Domuha
He gave no
Then
answer.
He was anxiously
sigh
witli
a deep
Pradyota
quoted
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
" The man
133
is
is
in the power of Love, good sir, the man that drunk or consumed by disease, he that's wroth, and he that
on the point
wish your
give
of
death
far behind.
So
:
if if
you
you
the
own
good, vouchsafe
Mayanamafijari
sir,
I
me
not your
shall enter
fire."
So Domuha, perceiving
his determination,
The wedding was celebrated on an auspicious day and hour. After staying some days Pradyota, having paid his respects and taken his departure, went to Ujjain.
One day
there
Festival.
Domuha
Then the
an Indra Banner.
of auspicious blessings,
of bells
and
hung with
fine
and gems, and laden with an abundant variety Then the dancers danced poems composed of pendent fruits. by good poets were sung, crowds of people danced, dazzling
of
jewels
illusions are
like.
in the air, masses of alms are given away, the bands crash with
drums and the rest. Thus in great delight pass seven days. The full-moon came. King Domuha honoured the Indra-Banner with great liberality, with flowers, robes and the like. On another day with a great roar of music down it fell on the ground. The king saw it fallen in a place foul with dung and
dirty
water, and
reflected
" Out
Seeing this he
flash
of lightning, ending in disgust! " As he thought thus he was enlightened, and became a Pratyeka-Buddha. Regarding the
world as but
five fist-fulls
'Tis said
And
perceiving the
pomp
discovered the
Law."
134
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Jain Maharastri]
Extract No.
17.
From an
translation
Jodhpur.
Text and
Asiatic
The
inscription
is
dated
Sarnvat 918.
is
named
Kakkuka
0(11.
Saggapavagga-maggara
I
padhamani
sayalana
karanain
devaiii
namaha Jina-nahain Rahu-tilao padiharo asT Siri-Lakkhano tti Ramassa tena Padihara-vanso samunnaim ettha sampatton 2. vippo Hariando bhajja asi tti khattia Bhadda
nisesa-duria-dalanam parama-gurum
i
ii
1.
ii
3.
tti
Narahada namo
jao Siri-Nahado
eassa
ii
4.
Jhoto
assa vi
tti
5.
ii
6.
Isiviasaiii
namayam
riarn
i
7.
na
thiani,
II
8.
vi
sokkhena
sawa
i
ii
9.
uaroha-raa-macchara-lohehim
naya-vajjiam jena
'
manayam
pi
10.
pi
ii
vi
danda-nitthavanani
11.
Read
kori or kahai'i.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
dhaiia-riddha-samiddhana
vi
135
pauranam niakarassaabbhahiani
ii
12.
<
nava-jovvana-ri3a-pasahiena singara-guna-garukkena
jena
jampantena ya
15.
i
Vadananaya-mandale payadamil 17. niluppula-dala-gandlia ratnma mayanda mahua-vindehim vara-icchu-panna-cchanna esa bhumi kaya jena 18. varisa-saesu a navasum attharasam'aggalesu Cettammi
II
i
il
19.
i
Rohinsakua-game nivesiam kitti-viddhiell 20. Maddoarammi ekko, bio Rohinsakua-gamammi 21. Jena jasassa va punja ee tthambha samutthavia tena siri-Kakkuenam Jinassa devassa duria-niddalanam karaviam acalam imam bhavanam bhattie suha-janayaraii 22, appiam earn bhavanam siddhassa Dhanesarassa gacchammii
i
||
Verse
sesa
1.
'
Apavagga
all
' '
'
final
beatitude
durita
'
'
(apa +
vrj).
ni-
{nihissa) 63.
sin.'
V.
2.
-padiharo
doorkeeper.' or
name
of clan,
vanso, better
spelling vamso,
V.
3.
bhajja 'wife'
50.
V.
5.
-namo
cf.
as in the next
cai 'generous'
tydgt)
AMg.
catta =
44.
119.
'
garavio
.
means
gauravitah
S*.
highly esteemed
{
cf
:
M.
AMg
;
gorava
V.
7.
= gaurava)
'
Pali garu
to
namiyam
meekness.'
136
V.
9.
INTRODUCTION TO PHAKRIT.
ipsiya
= prajdh,
' ' '
niya = m?o.
'
V. 10.
uaroa favour or
ill-will,
'
macchara
ti
envy
cf
vaccha
39.
i
= iti.
In AMg.
In
becomes
(Pischel 93).
JM.
V. 11.
dia
{nih
im pi
is
more
usual.
42.
'twice-born,'
nitthavanam
short vowel
cf.
'infliction'
+ sthdpanam)
67.
for
thavei
= .s^M-
payati.
V. 12.
paura
S'.
pora (=paura)
61.
ahhha,hia,rn
kam.
Kielhorn
ca
;
suggested
sarisattananca.
-ivana
drsatvanam
instead of
tative
-ttana = vedic
-tva.
ten-
of the original
may
V. 13.
be wrong.)
of =*garukya
cf.
Pali
janavaya = yana-
V. 14.
1 5.
= wedya to be blamed.' neya = waii"a. gaya-vaya 'aged = gata-vayas) iysb, JM. AMg. =iti. saya = sadd. panai = pranayin.
pada.
'
V. 16.
Marumadaprob. =Marwar. Gujjara = (zwr^'ara Gujar.' Here we have an older form of the modern Gujerat.'
'
'
gohana 'herd,'
Idkula,
^o-c?)^wa.
palli
'
hamlet.'
jalaula
= ;va-
V. 18.
V. 19.
aggala
= argala)
vihu
bia
'
moon.'
hattha = Hasta
the
constellation,
'second,'
V.20.
'for
merchants.'
payai
V. 23.
appiam
gaccha
'
gotthi
Translation.^
society.'
!
Om
is
Bow
to the lord of
tlie
Jinas. wlio
is
tlie
Follows what
apparently Kielhorn's.
INTRODUOTJON TO PRAKRIT.
path to
first
137
is
Ilea veil
all
the
cause of
The
glorious
his wife
was
Bhadrd
V.
4.
of the
Kshatriya caste.
To them
to
a valiant
son was born, named Rajjila. To him, again, Narabhata was born, and
him Nahada
{=Ndgabkata)
vardhana.
his son
V.
5.
born, and to
him
S'ilhika
his
Kakko
Kakkuka.
V.
7.
His smile
is
V.
8.
He never
V.
9.
remembered a thing, without benefiting mankind. Like a mother he constantly has kept in comfort all the people in his dominion, the poor and the prosperous, the lowest as well as the highest.
V.
10.
And
in
suit.'
V. 11.
punishment to be
inflicted
on the wicked.
of wealth
V. 12.
Even
to citizens possessed of
abundance
(?),
he
a lakh and a
like (?)*
'
"As much
as
was suitable
"
(?)
138
V. 13.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Though adorned with the freshness of youth and beauty, and full of the sentiment of love, he never
has behaved
to
people
so
as
to incur
men's
re-
To
young men
like a friend,
Always showing respect with politeness, praising virtues, and speaking pleasantly he has given an abundance
of
V.
16.
By
his
Marumada,
Valla,
Tamani,
....(?)
and Gujarat.
V. 17.
He
made
a conspicuous illumination
of the
villages
district.
on the
mountain
V. 18.
in the
rugged Vatananaka
made
dhuka
Vv. 19 and
trees
it
excellent sugar-cane.
20.
And when
the
by
eighteenth,
Caitra,
when
the
moon's
Kakkuka,
fit
founded a market,
merchants at the
V.21.
village of
Rohinsakupa.
He
of
has
erected like
pillars,
Rohinsakupa
temple of the god Jina, which des-
V. 22.
Iv.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
V. 23.
l39
And he
(?)
Jain Maharastri.
Extract No.
18.
From
story
of
Kalakacarya.
Jacobi
Z.D.M.G.
Vol.
34
(1880), p. 262.
King
of Ujjain,
who had
kuo
vi
silri,
anavarayam ca
tattha je sa-
nama
jo
killam.i
manta,
te
Sahino bhannanti
padiharo,
Sahanusahi-duo
duvare
" lahum pavesehi." pavesio ya vayanena antaram eva nisanno ya dinnasane. tao duena samappiyam uvayanam^ tam ca datthiiria nava-pausa^citthai."
kala-nahayalam
va
andhariyam
vayanam
Sahina.
tao
'
kuo
vi ^=kuto'pi.
'
cerebi-alise initial
cf.
n.
2
Saga-kula
for the
form
Asoga.
King
(Fleet,
Gupta
Inscriptions,
No.
I,
Samudra).
The context
two terms
in the
West
of India in connec-
avajjio a + vrj.
* itas
6
'
ca-anyada kadacit.
'
busying himself
(cest).
6 T
'gift'
pausa
'
rains
'
(pravrm).
140
cintiyani
:
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
" hanti
kamam apuvva-karanam
uvalakkhijjai,' jao
sevaya, so sama-vayano
etth'
disai.
pucchami
karanam
'
'
ti.
antarammi
Sahi-purisar
:
" hanta,
' '
tena sami-pasae samagae kim uvviggo viva lakkhiyasi ? " bhayavam, na pasao, kim tu kovo samagao bhaniyam
:
jao
amha pahu
jassa
rilsai,
tassa
nam'ankiyam muddiyaiu
karanena
churiyam
patthavei.^
tao
kenai
eie
amho
'
varini*
^
:
ugga-dando
vi kassa vi
sira pi
tti
kaiina
:
surina btianiyam
?
"
sahina bhaniyam
mama
vajjiyanam anne-
anko "
ma
appanain
kula-
vinasehi."
bhaniyam
" na
pahuna
jai vi
rutthena
kkhayam antarena
chuttijjai';
sesakulassa
khemam
vaharesu
bhavai."
^
evani, taha vi
:
jena
:
tao tena pucchio duo, jaha Hinduga-desam vaccamo." " bhadda ke te anne paiicanaui rayano, jesini kuvio devo ? "
!
pi
niya-diiya,
" samagacchaha
mama
samive,
ma
niya-jiviyaim pariccayaha,
hanti=:hanta.
//>>').
*
f>
uvarim=uvari.
eie ins.
fem.
'
with
this.'
ghaiyavva
fut. part,
6
T
uyahu
or
'
{utaho).
chan-nauinil 96th.
satthiB
9Gth.'
'weapon'
{.sastrika) .
'
numher
of
this
*
weapon appears as
vaharesvi
'
cf.
H. chutnti,
oluitti.
summon
'
'
(vi-^a
I"
Hinduga=Fers. Hinduk.
'
+ hr). vaccimo
"we
are going."
"
severally
pro/i/eiom.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
ssami."
'
141
tao te dupariccay-anlyattanao^ pananam savvasamaggim kauna agaya jhadatti^ tassa samivam, te ya samagae datthuna tenavi pucchiyii surino " bhayavarii kiiii " saamhehiin sampayani kayavvam?" surihim bhaniyain
: :
bala-vabana
tao
ettli'
uttariuna
samaruhiuna
janavattesu
samagaya
Surattha-visae.
tao
antarammi
tti
ya
samagao
pausa-samao;
duggama
raagga
[Then came the Autumn elaborately described.] evamviham ca saraya^-kala-sirim avaloiiina niya-samihiyasiddhi-kamena bhaniya te Kalaya-surina, jaha: "bho, kim evam nirujjama citthaha ? " tehim bhaniyam '* aisaha kim puno karemo " surina bhaniyam " ginhaha Ujjenim, jao tie padibaddho pabhuo Malava-deso tattha pajjattfe tumhanam nivvaho bhavissai." tehim bhaniyam: "evam karemo: parain n'atthi sambalayam, jamha eyammi dese amhanam bhoyana mettam ceva jayara." tao surina joga-cunna-ca/mw/zz/a-metta-pakkhevena suvanni-kaiina savvam kumbhakara -vaham bhaniya:- " eyam sambalara ginhaha" tao te tarn vibhanjiuna savva-samaggie patthiya Ujjenim pai.** antare
:
: : "^
''
ya
je
ke
vi
Ladaya-visaya-rayano, te sahetta
tao
"^
patta Ujjeni-
visayasandhira.
Gaddabhillo
parabalam
agacchantam
take care
bhalissami
or
fut.
of
of
'
*
i
:=duhparityajanlyatvat.
jhat
*
&
92.
autumn
'
'
{sarad).
'
nivvaho
abundance, liveUhood
(nirvuha).
pajjatti
'
sufficiency
{paryapti).
"^
sambalayam
cunna
'
jamha
abl. sing,
{yas
since.'
powder' H. cun.
cahuntiya
(?)
Unexplained.
^
if>
Tpa,i=prati.
'
telling,
summoning.'
Ladaya,
i.e.
Lata=S. Gujerat.
142
SO una
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
raahabala-samaggle niggao
pi
patto ya visaya-sandhim.
tao
donham
When
came
the sage by
to
know
of this,
he
Land
of the S'akas.
is
Those who
overlord of
is
Then the Kalaka sage abode with one of the Shahis, and won his favour by charm and spell. Now once upon a time when this Shahi was with the sage and full of
the porter entered and
made
this
announcement, "
is
My
lord, a
The Shahi said: "Bring him in at once." At the word he entered and sat down on the seat given him. Then the messenger handed over a present. At the sight of this the Shahi's face grew black as the sky at the beginning of the rains. Then
thought (the sage), "Well, surely this seems an extraordinary
thing; for servants
their master
when they
filled
see a
mark
of favour sent
is
by
become
I will
black
Meanwhile the messhown him by the Shahi's Then the sage asked " Come now, why do you seem people. He distressed at the coming of a favour from your lord? " replied: "Your Reverence, this is no favour, but a mark of For with whomever our king is his anger that has come. wroth, to him he sends a dagger marked with his name, so for some reason or other being wroth with us, he has sent this dagger; and with this same must I slay myself. His word The may not be gainsaid under pain of dreadful punishment.' said: "Is he wroth with you only, or with some other sage
as thunder.
senger went
to
the quarters
"
also?'"
sides
The Shahi said: "With ninety-five other kings bemyself for the weapon is marked with the number 96."
'
\\ddhavi\=uddhura.
acihana
'
l)attlo
'
(5
+ j/wdA).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIl".
:
143
Quoth the sage " If that is so, do not do away with yourself." The other said " When the king is enraged, he does not stop short of destroying a family, but when I am dead, the rest of my family will be left in peace." The sage said: " If that is so, send the word to all the ninety-five kings by your own messenger, that you are going to the Hinduk country." Then he questioned the messenger thus, " Good sir, who are the other " five and ninety kings with whom His Majesty is angry ? He gave all their names. Then dispatching a messenger lie sent his own message to them all severally, saying, "Come to me, do not abandon your lives, I will take thought for everything." Then they came to him straightway with all their gear, for it is hard for a man to abandon his life, and seeing they had arrived, he asked the sage: " Your Reverence, what are we to do now ? " The sage replied " Cross the Indus with troops and transport and go to the Hinduk country." Then they embarked on vessels and reached the district of Surat, and in the meanwhile the rainy season arrived. Then finding the roads were difficult, they divided the district
: :
of
the
autumn season
as described above,
own
wish, said
them: "Ho, why are you idling here?" Said they: " Direct us what we should do." The sage said: "Capture Ujjain, for that is the key to the there you will find subsistence in abunMalava country dance." They said " We will do so but we have no supplies, for in this country we have obtained barely enough to eat." Then the sage turned all the potters' stuff into gold by simply sprinkling it with magic powder and said to them
;
:
So they divided
it
and with
all
144
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
all complete and reached the frontier. between the two armies swelling with pride,
Then began a
battle
Ardha-Magadhi.]
Extract No.
19.
Udayana.
[Jacobi No. Ill, Portions.]
(p.
28
jaiiavaesu Viyabhae
namam
nagare hottha
'
tise jetthe
putte Abhii
hottha.
nama
maudanam
raisara-talavara-pabhilnam
The tale then switches into Jain Maharastri and tells of Kumaranandi the uxorious (' itthilolo ') goldsmith who collected 500 wives at 500 of gold apiece, and was chosen as their
lord
*****
ahevaccam
scripture language), of his conversion.
tae nani se
sing, in e
sing.
viinna
seya-camara-vaya-viyananam annesini ca
kunamane
viharai.^
Eventually
Magadhl
(p. 32.)
(i.e.
salae
I
Udayane raya annaya kayai posahapakkhiyam posaham sammam padijaposahie ege abie
being a characteristic of this
Viyabhae=F*to6Aa2/o, iiom.
Prakrit,
per.sons
* 3
hottha 3rd
aor.
and numbers.
'
bhainejja
sister's
son
'
{bhagineya).
niyaya=niya
'
own
'
(nija).
pamokkho (pramukha).
tevatthi
'sixty-three'
.30.3
(also
tosatthi)
saya 'hundred'
/^ata
112,
towns."
seya
'
viinna
'
bestowed'
pi.
(vi-^tr).
'
'
white'
(.weta).
vlyana
rSisara
'
fanning
'
[vlj).
annesim gen.
ahevaccani
of other
.
princes
(rajeSvara).
A-a."
overlordship
'
(ad/iipatyam).
kunamane atm.
pres,
part, of kunai.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
145
garamane
pajjittha
^
viharai.'
tao
tassa
puvvaratta'varatta-kala-sa-
dhanna nam
te crama-nagara, jattha
;
nam samane
Vire viharai,
je
dhammam
kahei
dhanna
nain te ralsara-pabhiio,
nisamenti,-'
dhammam
hhagavam
vitta agarao
anagariyam pavvayanti.^
tarn jai
nam samane
ih'
Mahavire
puvvanupuvvim
tae
diiijjamane
eva
eyaruvam ajjhatthiyam
viharai.
janitta
Udayane
ya.
tae natii
Udayane
vaya--
Mahavirassa antie
si:*
dhammam
3occa liattha-tutthe
evam
jam navaram jettha-puttam rajje ahisiilcami, tao nam tubbham antie pavvayami. sami bhanai ahasuham, ma padibandham karehi tao nam Udayane abhiogiyam hatthi-rayanam
:
!
tao
Udayanassa eyaruve
^ 74.
ajjhatthie
kayai
'
kadaoit.'
a-bie 'without
a second.'
pakkhiyam
'
lasting a fortnight.'
sammam
'
(samyak).
padi-
jagaramane
^
keeping
'
vigil.'
puvvaratta
first
night.'
karsmana atm.
cf.
from
karei.
eyaruva
of this form.'
ajjhatthie 'thought'
(adhyatmika).
samuppajjittha.
aorist
(sam+ud
-^pad)
^
hottha
hear
'
'
was.'
kevali
'
-pannattarn (prajnaptam).
for laymen. Jain duvalasa twelve."
'
nisamenti
+
+ sam).
{anuvrata)
:
aauvvayam 'ordinance'
bhavitta gerund
commands
technicality,
^
agara
'
house.'
puvvanupuvvim
parisa
'
in
succession.'
diiijjamane
'
wandering
'
{du)
agacchejja, opt.
"J
community (parimd).
'
socca 'having heard' (srutva). cf. caccara = ca< vara. hrnta. vayasi spoke.' aorist {vad).
^
'
'^
J.M. hattha =
abhiogiyam (abhiyogika) sometimes a kind of deity " belonging to Here Jacobi suggests a state elephant, duruliitta having mounted' (*uduruh for ud + ruh). mucchie greedy (murch).
'
10
146
jae
;
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
jai
nam
bhogesu
mucchie
anaiyani
tarn
rajje
anavayaggani
samsara-kantaram
anupariyattissai.'
Kesim kumarani
hetta
^
evam sampeya
sobhane
*
tihi-karana-muhutte
vayasi
:
kodumbiya-purise
saddavetta
evam
raya'bhiseyam uvatthaveha!
kumare raya jae Java pasasemane viharai. tao Udayane ray a Kesim rayam apucchai ahan-nam, devanuppiya,^ sam:
sara-bha'uvviggo pavvayami.
saddavetta
khippam eva Udayanassa ranno mah'atthani mah'ariham nikkhamana'bhiseyam uvatthaveha! tao mahaya vibhuie abhisitte siviy'ariidhe^ bhagavao samive
:
evam vayaai
tao
se
jass'
anaiyam without beginning.' anavayaggani without end,' lit. having the point not bent.' anupariyattissai will wander through (anu + pari + vrt).
'
'
'
'
seyam
'
better
'
'
(sreyas).
pavvaittae,
infin.
sampehetta
This treat-
ment
common
in
AMg. JM.
anuppeof
hanti^anupreksante.
'
* kodumbiya belonging to the family.' saddavettS, saddavei caus. of saddei nominal from sadda (^abda).
''
gerund
eva)
juttani eva
iddhi
= rddhi.
sing,
1
^
**
devanuppiya, voc.
siviya
'
deva+anuppiya.
palki
'
{Hbika).
kuvvamSne
:
cf.
'0
saiiianna abstract of
Pischel
for
va
(cf.
= J/i<(/o/a).
fnl-
also
.j6.
pajjaya.
paunitta
havinu
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
atthae'
kirai
147
jav^a dukkha-pahine-tti.
nam Abhil-kumarassa puvvarattavaiatta-kala-samayevam ajjhatthie jae: ahani Udayanassa jetthaputte Pabhavaie attae mam rajje atthavetta Kesim rajje thavetta* pavvaie. imenam manusenam dukkhenam abhibhue samane^ Viyabhayao niggacchitta Campae Koniyara uvasampajjittanam viula-bhoga-samannagae yavi hottha.* se nam Abhil kumare samano'vasae* abhigaya-jivajive Udayanenam ranna samanubaddha-vere yavi hottha. tao Abhii kumare bahuim vasaim
tae
anisi
;
kalam
thii'^
Asurakumarattae uvavanno.
sijjhihi-tti.''
egara paliovamam
tassa; Maharidehe
Translation.
Udayana.
At that period and
at that very time there was a city Vita-
bhaya by name in the countries of Sindh and Sauvira. Udayana was the king thereof, and PrabhavatI his queen. Her eldest son was crown prince, Abhijit by name, and she had a nephew named Ke^i. Now that Udayana the king was wielding the overlordship of sixteen countries whereof Sindh and
filled' {pra-ap).
anasana
'fasting.'
cf.
chettum
M. JM. chettiana
'
(*chtittetta chetetta).
atthae
'
on account
of.'
attae
'
son
'
{atmajah).
(stha).
^
^
samSne
'
'
being.'
uvasampajjittanam
gerund
{upa + sam-\-pad).
yavi (ca+api).
samannagaya
'pro-
vided with
<>
(sam-^anu + a + gmn).
'
samanovasaya
sarnlehana
'
<>
final
tisam
thirty."
^
anSloiya
(A\r).
'
unrepented
'
(analocita)
padikkante
'
confe.s.sed.'
kicca
gerund
8 "
thii
durance
'
^ 12.
will
be
148
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
of
townships and
of
And even
was.
in the hall
Now
of fasting,
Now
as this
Vfra dwells, and declares the law; rich are those princes and
the like,
who
in the presence of
Maliavira
hear
now the
from place to place should come here to Vitabhaya, then would I before the holy one strip me and enter the Order. Now
the holy one knowing this thought of Udayana's departed from
his
of Vita-
bhaya, where the Deer-park was, and the community came out,
presence of Mahavira was pleased and delighted
"
I will
my
make no obstacle!"
mounted a splendid state elephant and went within his house. Then there came to Udayana such a thought as this: 'If now I put Prince Abhijit on the throne, and enter the Order, then Abhijit on the throne, in the kingdom and the country,
lusting
among
is it
the.
human
joys of
of rebirth
better to place
I
my nephew
throne before
Having pondered
,
on an auspicious lunar day, half-day and moment he summoned the men of his household and spake thus: "Quickly prepare
INTRODUCriON TO PRAKRIT.
the coronation of Prince Kesi."
Tlien with trreat
149
pomp
Prince
of
King Kesi
"
now, oh beloved
gods,
Then
of
his
rich
palanquin went into the presence of the holy one and entered
the Order, and continued to perform
many an
act of penance,
for
many
vow
of homeless
cut
a
off
Now
of
in
the
middle
:
of
Abhijit as follows
Prabhavatl.
Campa where
he
Now
of the
for
many
off
fate, to
become
it
Demon
The duration
thereof
is
one myriad;
will
be
fulfilled in
great Videha.
Ardha-Magadhi.
Extract No.
20.
From
(180).
Uvasagadasao.
ujjaiie.
Polasapure
namam
nayare
Sahassambavane
Jiya-sattii raya.
150
(181).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Tattha nam Polasapure nayare Saddala-putte
'
namam
atthe
ayam param'atthe, sese anatthe " tti enain appanam bhavemane viharai.
(182).
Ajiviya-sama-
Tassa
nam Saddalaputtassa
nihana-pautta,
Ajiviyovasagassa ekka
hiranna-kodi
ekka
vaddhi-pautta,
nam vaenam.^
(183).
namam
(184).
bhariya hottha.
Tassa
saya
nam
Tattha
nam bahave
purisa
dinna-
bhai-bhatta-vejana
kallakallim*
vahave karae
ya
Ajiviovasae,
'
The
Mahavira.
tion or labour or
is no such thing as exerpower or vigour or manly strength, but all things are
unalterably fixed."
^
Uvasaga-d, VI.
S
160.
"
92. v.
:
:
3 mimja, 'marrow': Panjabi minjh, mijjh SindhI miju Guj. mij. H, migi (Skt. majja). Hoernles translates " being filled with a passionate
love towards
for the
them as tor the most excellent thing," i.e. as in his note '* marrow of bones." The marrow is rather the physical basis
' '
as
of
by a teacher
to his pupil.
vae
'
herd
'
(vratah).
6 it
'
Hoernle takes
"received food
in
lieu
of wage.*;."
board and wages.' It would appear that their salary comprised food every morning.' For and wages. Kallakallirn (Skt. kabjam knlyam) ending, compare puvvini (=punnm).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kalasae
karenti,'
151
ya alinjarae ya jambulae
anne ya
se
ya uttiyao ya
jd'va
kappemana
viha-
Tae nam
se
antiyam
viharai
(186),
dhamma-pannattim
uvasampajjittanam'^
(1
S7).
Tae nam
Java
se
Saddalaputtam Ajiviovasayam evam " Ehii nam, devanuppiya, kallani iham maha-mahane uppanna-nana-damsana-dhare 'tlyaparihie
vayasl.
paocuppanna-m-anagaya-janae^ Araha
Jine
Kevall
sammananijje
jdva
kallanam
mangalam
tacca-^'
devayam
1
eeiyam''
pajjuvasanijje,^
M.W.
varaka
'pitcher'
uttiya
^
'
-tta after a
gacchai. gacchitta
3
*
''
Gerund from uvasampajjai (upa -^ sam + pad). atm. aor. of paubhavai {pradur -^bhii) appeared.'
'
'tiya-
'present' {prati
+ ut
-^-
pad)
-m-
future.'
for
padup-
panna,
6
7
*
i.e.
*
padi
+ uppanna.
'
ceiya
sacred
lit.
'Worshipful' (prati-^upa+as).
tacca
'
meritorious."
Comm.
Cf.
sa,y=tatlvja so also
,
Heraacandra
(
II. 21
Otherwise irom
tattva.
Pischel
true.'
through *taUya.
Romani tatcho='
152
lNTROI)UCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kamma-sampaya-sampautte
dejjahi
tarn
nam tumam
padiharienagi
'
vanpi-
jdva
pajjuvasejjahi,
dha-phalaga-sijja-samtharaenarp
Doccaiii pi taccam pi
uvanimantejjahi."
-tta
evam
vayai,
of
Mahavira
Tae nam
se Saddalaputte Ajlviovasae imise'^ kahae laddhatthe samane " evam khalu samane bhagavam
;a?;a
pajjuvasami,"
payacchitte
"*
jdva
saddhappavesaim
kiya-sarire
jdva appa-mahagghabharanalarisao''
manussa-vaggura''-parigae
-ttd
gihao
padi-nikkhamai,
majjhenaTp niggacchai,
ujjane jeneva samane
uvagiicchai
karei
ttd -ttd
jeneva Sahassambavane
tikkhutto''
vandal naraamsai
jdva pajjuvasai.
pratiharika "a Jain technical term, meaning ready for the use of some one.' " Hoernle.
I
'
what
is
always kept
* 3
imi8e=M.
sampehei
imae
6.
imae.
(sam-^pra + lk/f).
kkh
kh
^
rites.
'
h.
This
change occurs
*
Comm. z=praya.icitta
is
'
expiation,'
\)y
i.e.
prpcautionary
Another
'
interpretation
^
touched
touch
(ksip).
'
Comm. Auddhdtma-vaimkani
'
(clothes)
fit
or Auddha-pravcyf/mii
*
''
clean and
fit
vaggura
sao
'
'
toils
'
from
own
'
(sra), giha
tikkhutto
'
'thrice'
(*trii^krtrnh
AMg. dukhutto,
dukkhutto
twice.'
\^f\y n\<'\<nH.\n
i'\'nhinnin
= u-d(tkKina-pradakiiiuam.
INTRODUCTION TO PICAKUIT.
l-'^S
salahinito bahiya
ayavamsi dalayai.'
Tae nam samane bbagavam MahavTre Saddalaputtani Ajlviovasayaip evam vayasi. " Saddalaputta, esa ^ nain kolala-bhande kao "
?
(197).
Tae nam se Saddalaputte Ajiviovasaye samanam bbagavam Mahavlram evam vayasi. " Esa nam bhante
puvvim mattiya
ttd
asl,
tao paccha
udaenam
;
nimijjai;
-ttn
cakke
arohijjai
tao
kajjanti."
(198).
Tae nam samane bhagavam Mabaviro Saddalaputtam Ajiviovasayam evam vayasi. "Saddalaputta, esa nam kolalabbande kim uttbanenam jdva purisakk<\ra-parakkamenam kajjanti, udahu anuttbanenam jdva " apurisakkara- parakkamenam kajjanti ? Saddalaputta maintains tbat they are made without
effort,
etc.
because
effort
is
Near
it
there
mas
Jiya-sattii
was king.
(ISl).
There
in the
town
named
Having
heard
of,
of
the tenets
and mastered the meaning thereof, he became enamoured of these with a passionate love suffusing the verv marrow of hir^ bones and continued to
'
'
(atape).
'
form
in
AMg.
foi*
gives.'
kao
'
from what'
(ktttah,i.e. *ka-tah), S.
'
kado. a man."
cf.
p\ivisakkaTa=punisat kara
as can be
made by
balakkara
=balat-kara.
154
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
conduct himself
in
had
of the Ajiviyas,
had
named Aggimitta.
tlie
(184).
That Saddalaputta,
had
five
of Polasapura.
men
receiving
wages
in
day numerous bowls, pots, pans, pitchers of three sizes and three sizes of water- jars and another large number of men, receiving wages in the form of food
;
to carry
highway with those numerous bowls, pots, pans, pitchers of three sizes and three sizes of water-jars.
(185).
of the Ajiviyas,
midday
himself
;
this he did
and he was
living in
Then
in raid -air
(ow
down
to
" There
will
come
here to-morrow,
<)
beloved of the
knowledge and
insight,
is
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
155
who knows
at,
all
and sees
all,
who
is
rapturously gazed
dwellers in the
adored
three worlds,
who
men and
asuras is an object of worship, praise, lionour, respect and service as something excellent, auspicious, divine
so
on),
who
is
furnished with an
abundance
praise
of meritorious
(and as
above,
down
hospitably invite to a standing provision of stool, plank and bedding." A second and a third time he
Then
*****
that Saddalaputta
,
;
in
that
will
{so on,
dovm
to)
and (as before) performed precautionary rites, put on clean robes, adorned his person with a few costly
jewels,
and surrounded by a crowd of men-servants Having come out, he passed the midst of the town of Polasapura. right through Having passed through he approached the place, where there was the Sahassambavana Garden where
the blessed Mahavira was, and having approached, he circumambulated him three times from left to
Having done so he praises him, and worships him and (having praised him, and worshipped him, and so on, down to) he stands in waiting upon
right.
him.
(195).
Then that Suddalaputta, the follower of the at some time or other brought out his
potter's ware from within his workshops
:
Ajiviyas,
air-dried
and having
done so placed
it
156
(196).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Then the
Ascetic, the blessed Mahavira, spoke thus unto Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajivias, " Saddala-
putta, what
(197).
is
this potter's
ware made
of
"
"This ware was at first clay, and after kneaded with water; and then it is thoroughly mixed with potash and dung and then it is placed upon the wheel and thence are made many
that
is
;
rest
as before).^
Then the
Ascebic, the blessed Mahavira, spake thus unto Saddalaputta, the follower of the Ajiviyas: " Saddalaputta, is tliis potter's ware made with
to)
manly strength,
or
is it
made without
strength?"
down
to)
manly
Ardha-Magadhi,
Extract No.
Jinacaritra
21.
being
part
of
the
Kalpastitra
ascribed
to
Bhadrabahu.
Edited by Jacobi.
(56).
Tae
'
nam Siddhatthe
khattie pacci5sa-kala-samayamsi
-tta
kodumbiya-purise saddavei,
(57).
evam vayas!
'
"khippam'^ eva,
bho Devanuppiya
*
ajja
savisesam
J.
reads tate
fil.
in this
places.
tae.
'
Vide page
*
assembly-room, pavilion.'
cleaned
'
'
{^uc)
'
'
smeared
'
{upa +
lip).
'
INTRODUCTION TO PKAKRIT.
157
dhuyabhiramam
'
sugandha-vara-gandhiyaii) gandha-
ya karavitta
ya sihasanam rayaveha,''
-tta
'
Tae nam
te
kodumbiya-purisa
kattu:^
Siddhatthenam ranna
tti
hattha-tuttha-/ava -haya-hiyaya,
"evam sami!"
-tta
anae
Siddhatthassa
jen'eva bahi-tta
-i/a
khip-
pam eva
jen'eva
-tta
rayavinti,
-tta
uvagacchanti,
tam
anat-
tiyam paccapjiinanti.
(59).
kallain
pau-ppabhayae raya-
raga-sarise
''
(bandhujivaga
"^
parava
kusuma
aguru
rasi
'
'
aloe.'
cf.
maghar.ta
xiddh'ita.
'^
Pb.
'
'
dhQva
'
incense.'
vatti (varti).
'^
rayaveha
2nd
have prepared
'
caus. {rac).
'
+
^
returns
'
ppagasa (prakasa).
{suka).
;
suya
.sayasiare,
"parrot"
nijjao
gunjaddha.
with
The
eonstrucfcion
is
Siddhatthe.
abbhutthei
locative
absolutes
rayanie,
pabhae.
paravana
'
pigeon
rose.'
'
"
(paravata).
jasuyana 'Chinese
'
hingulaa,
cinnabar.'
nikara
'
mass.'
alireka
excess."
rehanta
shining.'
158
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kamalayara-sanda-bohae
'
balayava-kunkumenam
khaciya
vva
jlva-loe)^
sayanijjao abbhutthei.
(60).
-ltd
ten'eva
-ltd
attana-salam
anupavisai,
anega-vayama jogga-vaggana-vamaddana-mallasante
parissante
juddha-karanehim,^
hassa-pagehim "
saya-paga-sapinanijje-
sugandha-tilla-m-aiehim
savv'indiya-gaya-palhayanijjehijii
abbhari-
maddan-uvvalana-karanaguna-nimmaehini
"
cheehitn
jiya-
dakkhehim patthehim
kusalehini
mehavihim"
"' parissamehim atthi-suhae manisa-suhae taya suhae roma-suhae cauvvihae suha-parikammanae samva-
jen'eva
majjana-ghare, ten'eva
uvagacchai,
-ttd
bohae
'
awakening' (bodhakab).
'
in
'
due time
'
{yatha-krameua).
paliaia
'
blows' (pra.sun."
+ radh).
balayava 'young
gymnasium
'
Kadambaii
mallajuddha,
has vyaySma-6ala.
^
vaggana 'jumping.'
saya-pagaabbhaiigie
'
vamaddana (ui-t-a+mordona).
hundred times
'
wrestling.
<
1
refined a
'
'
(^ata-pakor),
anointed
oldgf.
Mg. abbhahgide JM. abbhahgio retain the prlnaniya soothing.' madanlya invigorat'
'
ing.*
8
"
brmhanlya
nirmata
cheka
*
'
'
nourishing.'
-prahladaniya refreshing.
'
experienced.'
udvalana
'
stretching.'
clever.'
praHha
pre-eminent.'
medhavi
'
intelligent.'
10
tayS 'skin'
{*ii:aca
= tvak).
INTBODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
majjana-gharam anupavisai,
-tta
159
sa-mutta-]alakula-
tattha
ahaya-sumah'aggha-dusa-rayana-susamvude
''
sarasa-surabhi-gosisa-candananulitta-gatte
sui-mala-
vannaga-vilevane"*
aviddha-mani-suvanne
"^
kappiyaka-
har'-addhahara ^ -tisaraya-palamba-palambamane
di-suttaya-kaya-sobhe
laliya-kayabharane
''
vara-kadaga-tudiya-thambhiya-
mud-
diya-pingal'-angulie
palamba-palambamaria-sukaya-
naddha-aviddha-vlra-valae;
1
"^
kim bahuna:
kappa-
jala
lattice
'
windows
'
of stone work.
'
2
'^
kottima
'
mosaic pavement
{kuttima).
bhatti (hhakti),
*
5>
'
(paksmala).
kasaiya
'
dyed
red.'
lii-
hiya
6
1 *
**
'
dried'
(luifita ?).
ahaya 'new'
gosisa
'
(ahata).
dma
'robe'
'
(cf.
dusya
'
tent, cotton').
cow's-head
a rich sandal
(varnaka).
vannaga
kadi
'
sandal
'
of eighteen strings."
'0
hip' (kati).
suttaya,
belt
'
(sutraka).
'
graiveya
collar.'
kaya
'
pair
'
'
{kaca).
kadaga bracelet'
ujjoviya
(kataka).
tudiya
'
bangle'
(trutika).
'* 16
16
otthaya
covered with'
(ava->r8tr), cf.
oviya 'decorated.'
Pischel
588.
160
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
rukkhae ceva alamkiya-vibhiisie nar'inde sa-korinta-
malla-damenam
vara-camarahim
sadda-kayaloe
chattenam
dharijjatnanenam
'
seya-
uddhuvvamanihim
raangala-jaya-
anega-gananayaga-dandanayaga-raisa
sihe abbhahiya-raya-teya-lacchie
gliarao padinikkhamai.
(62).
a jen'eva
-ttd
slhasanamsi puratthabhimuhe
nisiyati.
(63).
-ttd
sanaim
siddh'atthaya-
kaya-maugalovayaraiin rayavei,
appano a-durasanha-
uggayarp
patta-bhatti-saya-citta
-
tu-
bha -camara kunjara vanalaya paiima -laya - bhatticittam'* abhintariyam javaniyam aiichavei,^ -ttd na-
na-raani-rayana-bhatti-cittani
attharaya-miu-masu-
'
!;
l.'i.").
of
personages
may
be
interpreted
variously,
ralsvara
(raje^vara)
Comm. z=ijuvaraid.
'
Jacobi S.B.E.
'kings,
princes'
danda-
nayaka 'judges.'
J. 'knights.'
'
madambiya
masters.'
^
sheriffs.'
ptthamanda
'
parasites, companions,' J.
dancinsi;
purattha
'
ea.st
'
(purastat).
'
*
^
pacciitthuya=paecutthaya 'covered
(prati
'
+ava+str).
sanha
'
smooth
"
(alaksna).
i'i/ala(ka)
tana
'
thread
'
(tana).
*
T
ihamrna
wolf.'
'
'snake
-lava laya
= /a/a.
amchavei
has drawn.'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
rag'
161
-otthayam
'
su-
mauyam
anga-suha-pharisagam"'^
Tisalae
khattiyanie bhaddasanain
purise saddavei
(64).
,
rayavei,
vayasi.
kodumbiya-
-ttd
evam
"khippam
mitta-sutt-attha-dharae
viviha-sattha-kusale suvina-
-lakkhana-padhae saddaveha.
Translation.^
(56).
at the
time of daybreak
:
(57).
make ready
all
audience,
that
it
be)
sprinkled
with scented
with
offerings
of
fragrant,
excellent
flowers
of all
five colours,
made
and
into
turushka,
and
burning
incense,
exquisitely
as
it
were
this arrange
my
(58).
me
quickly
Then the family servants, on being thus addressed by the King Siddhartha, with glad, pleased and {so on down to) enraptured hearts, saluted (as before down to
'
on their heads
'
and
'
:
.politely
the
command
saying
Yes master
'
Then they
left
'
attharaka
'
coverlet.'
{a-^str).
masi?ra{fca)
'
pillow.'
^ ^
mauya
translation
The Kalpasutra was translated by Dr. J. Stevenson, 1848. That however is not accurate. The standard translation is that of Hermann Jacobi's Sacred Books of the East Series, vol. XXII, p. 241ff.
make
11
162
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
to the outer hall of audience and quickly they
(made
ready) in
all
Having done
and
and
reported
the
execution
that
order to the
Kshatriya Siddhartha.
(59).
Then on the morrow wlien the night was growing light, when the pale morning disclosed the soft flowers of the
full-blown lotuses, and the sun arose
;
in
hue
like the
bill
and
waker
and the
in his
maker
risen
of the
;
radiance
due time the maker of the day had the blows of his hands the darkness was and by
when
the
it.
and having
risen he
and
entei'ed
And
with
many
lie
and then
fragrant
oil, distilled
On
palms
of the
hand and
by clever men
who were
1
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
anointing, kneading and stretching
ful,
;
163
well trained, skil-
excellent,
expert,
intelligent
and never
tiring.
When by
fited,
the kino's bones, flesh, skin and hair had been bene-
and
his
bathing house, he
pleasant
bath-room delightpearls,
its
with
floor
gems,
he sat
bathed himself with water scented with flowers and perfumes, with tepid water and pure water, according
to
an excellent metliod
of
healthy exercises.
ing with
When
many hundredfold pleasures was over, his body was dried with a long-haired soft scented and coloured towel, he was clad in a new and costly excellent robe, his limbs rubbed with fresh and fragrant
go&irsha
witii
line garlands
and sandal-ointment.
He
and and one with a pendant and adorned himself with a zone. He put on a necklet, rings and ciiarming ornaments for the hair, and encumbered his arms with splendid bracelets and bangles. He was
three strings
hung (round
His face was illuminated by head with a diadem. His breast was covered, decked and adorned v^ith necklaces, his fingers
of
exceeding beauty.
his
earrings,
His
fine cloth
toga was
as
pendants.
He put on
an
emblem
of his
precious stones of
many
164
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
was
like a
An
He was
fanned with
excellent
Surrounded
sheriffs,
by many
logers,
bodyguards,
servants,
dancing
and
frontier-
guards, he
among men,
a great
and
of brilliant asterisms
left
the bathing
house,
(62).
down on
his
On
Not too
It
far
from and
of the
drawn
a famous
town
soft cloth
was covered
all
men, crocodiles,
Behind
Trisala,
it
Then he
INTKODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
(64).
165
"Quickly,
of
of prognostics
with
many
sciences besides
Magadhi.]
Extract No.
22.
S'akuntala.
Interlude at the beginning of Act VI.
p. 216).
(Pischel p. 113
M.W.
maha-
Pohcemen.
masadide
Fisherman.
'
si tti
kadua
dhl-
de paliggahe dinne
Fisher.
S'unudha dava.
vale.*
Sec. Pol.
Hande padaccala
?
^
va-
sadim ca puScide
[Superintendent.
padibandhedha].*'
Suaa
Ma nam
hande
'
cf.
hanta
'
go to
'
!
kumbhilaa
thief
'
orig.
crocodile.'
57.
-bha^ula=
bhasura.
ukkmna,=:utklrna.
akkhh\a=^aksara, according to
Gramma-
rians should
be
(Hemacandra) ahkala.
[h=jihvamuliya].
laakiye
'
royal.'
Pischel thought
we should read
laa-kelake.
samasSdide
(sam-^a-^sad).
^ akayya [akdrya) crime.' MSS. akajjassa which is Saur. ^ lanna by the king.'
'
'
most
of his
= karakah.
*
'
Sakravatara, dhlvarah.
pataccara or pataccara
'
thief.'
yadim
MSS.
Pischel Gr.
pucide=
(sue).
=laur. pucchido.
Suaa
'
spy
'
166
Both.
Fisher.
INTRODUCTION lO PRAKRIT.
Yam
S'e
lautte anavedi.
Lavehi,
le
lavehi.!
'
hage
yala-badi^a-ppahudihim
raa^ca-bandhano
!]
Bhattake
kila
ma evam bhana
vi
Sahaye
[Supdt.
Fisher.
ye
nindide na hu ^e
kamma
vivajjaniake
vi Lottie.
Tado, tado
?]
Adha
ekkadiai^ani
mae
lohida-inascake
khandaSo
kappide.*
gahide
bhavami^Sehim.
Ettike
va.^
ti
Janua, macchodara-samthidam
vissagandho.
saradeho.
Tadha aam
Agamo
jjeva
danini
edassa
vimarisidawo.
Ta edha
le
raaiilani
gacchamha].''
Policemen.
[Supdt.
{To
the
Fisherman) Ga^ca
Go-ura-duare
ganthi-chedaa ga4ca.
Siiaa!
idha
appamatta
padivaledha
mam
Both.
[Supdt.
I
= Saur.
'
ySla
'
net.'
bali^a
hook.'
raaica
fish.'
kalemi=Saur.
(in
karerai.
^ahaya
(so/!a;a).
kalana = A*arar!a/
six
kainma long
Lottie =irotriy ah
*
for
metre, vidule
'
skilled
'
the
occupations).
lohida-
'
Roh
'
Saur. rohido,
'
M. rohio
(?),
.According
and the Lalitavicraharaja-natakani it should be pe4kami. Text has pekkhami. vikkaattham in order to sell' maledha imperat. of m8ledi = marf''
'
yati.
Januka
'
Policeman's
*
name.
vissa=tnsra
'
raw
''
flesh.'
vimarisid&yvo=i^marstavyah
cut-purse.'
ganthi-chedaB
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Spy.
IB?
Janua
cilaadi lautte.'
Januka.
Spy.
Nam
Fisher.
Jan.
saSanam.
adhava giddha-sialanam
[Supdt.
Fisher.
(Entering)
his voice)].
He hade mhi
Muiioedha
re
[Supdt.
kila
me kadhidam].
Spy.
Yadha anavedi lautte. Yama-va4adim gadua padiniutte khu eie. (Releases the fisherman).
(Saluting the Supdt.)
(falls at
Fisher.
Bhattake tava
kelake
mama
ylvide!
his
feet).'^
!
[Supdt.
Utthehi, utthehi
sam(Gives
Ta genha edam]
fisherman a bracelet).
(Receiving
it
Fisher.
with delight)
Anugahide mhi.
Jan.
E^e khu
lanfia
yam 6ulado,
odalia
hasti-skandham ^amalovide.^
Spy.
Lautte! paHdo^ie kadhedi mahahha-Iadanena teni ahguliaena Samino
bahumadena hodavvam
ti."^
cilaadi
'
'
is
a long time.
offers
"
^
5
(upa+srp).
Similarly
(vi-\-a+pad).
sphulanti 'quiver.'
*i
vavadedura
fish.
infin. caus.
na+alihadi
^aiila
(arhati).
(" sakula")
kind of
Thet-e
are
Pischel aays=^svakulanafp,.
6
kelake = kerako the prototype of genitival affixes like -kero -ker- er.
'
yivide
^
life."
odalia
(of.
odara
'
75)=avatarya.
^amalovide
past
'
part.
caus.
(aam+a+ruh).
tion to
S
Mounted on the withers of an elephant denotes high dignity (M W.). Text has hatthi-kkhandham.
eleva-
mahaliha=ma^dr?/a.
168
[Supdt.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Nain tassim bhattino mahariha-radanani
ti
na paridoso.
Ettikam una
Both.
[Supdt.
].
Kim nam a 1
Takkemi
vi
tassa
ti,
damsanena ko
asi].'
vi
hiaa-tthido
jano
bhattina sumarido
gambhiro
Spy.
Jan.
pajjussua-niano
tti
{looks
Fisher.
Bhattaka
ido
addham
tumhanam
pi
sula-mullain
bhodu.
Jan.
Dhlvala
vutte'^i
mahattale ^ampadam
kadambali-saddhike kkhu
6ohide i^cladi.
Ta
4unclikagalain
yyeva ga^camha.^
{Exeunt omnes).
Magadhi.
Extract No.
23.
Sthavaraka
Hage
nialena ;amina
Bhodu! akkandami. S'unadha, ayyasunadha. Asti danim mae pavena pavahana-padivattena Puspa-kalandaayinnuyyanaiii Vasantasena nida. Tado mama isamina main na kame^i' tti kadua, bahu-pas^a-balakkalena malida, na una edina ay yena. Kadham ? Viduladae na ko vi sunadi. Ta kirn kalemi ? Attanaatp paclemi. (Reflecting) Yai evvam kalemi, tada ayya-Caludatte na vavadiadi. Bhodu. Imado panada
'
'
p&i(ii=.prakrti.
pajjussiia (paryutsuka)
cf.
cf.
41.
;
ma^cali
'fish,"
Hindi machli
Sindhi
raachdi
MarSthi masli
of maccha=matjj/a
56.
'
kadainbali, kadamba
toddy.'
dad-
dhike
enjoyment'
(sagdhi).
^ohide z=sauhrdam
or
sauhityani.
dundikagala 'grog-shop.'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
vami.
169
vA^apadave
ayya-Caludatte.
mae
hi na uvalade rahi. Bhagge me danda-niale. Ta candala-ghosam ilamanneSami. apave sinless.' vavadiadi, pass. caus. (vi + d + pad), iiialena
palaloe.
'
'
with a fetter
'
'
(nigada).
malida
S'.
marida.
-balagga-
'
dove-
cot
(?)
[vdldgra).
padoUka
{pratoli)
'gateway'
(vide Vogel,
J.R.A
S.,
July,
cf.
190(5).
gav'akkha
'
bull's-eye,'
round window
or loophole,
i.e.
'
French
(Ace.
oeil
de
window.'
gavahka).
Grammarians should be gava4ka or uvalade 'done for' (upa ratah). padave 'tree.'
vivayyami
world.'
(text
vivajjami)
(vi
+ pad),
pala-loe
'
the
other
Magadhi.]
Extract No.
24.
kulena gulodanena.'
Candalavaae
^ala-
(Listening)
Bhinna-kam^a-khankhanae
Samyoe.''
Yadha
hanam a
tjhanam niadi
Ta
peski^iam.
S'attuvinase
nama mama
bhuttam mae
oi
'
'
have dined'
imll).
cf.
(bhuj).
tikkha
'
pungent' =tlksna.
*
(Possibly tihkha
amilika
acid,'
cf.
'
tama-
rind
(amlika
cf.
H.
bhatte 'food,'
ruva.
'rice.'
bhakta
H. bhat.
SiTpa,
would expect
kula
' '
^iiva
attanaa^a a
'
later
36.
2
food, boiled
rice.'
guJodana
of
Sala-samyoa
combination
'
accents.'
'
vsa
'
speech.'
^
kamia
brass,' etc.).
ukkhalide 'raised.'
khal
'move
or shake.'
vadhya.
that Mg. y differed from the usual pronunciation of "^ in the direction
of zh.
Hemacandra should be
170
INTROOUCTION TO PRAKKIT.
hodi.'
vavadaantatn
na
hodi.
pi
peskadi,
tas4a
anna^sim jammantale
ahkhi-roge
via
kidaena
kiin
dalidda-Carudattaha vina^e.^
da- balagga-padolikae
ahiluhia attano
look) Hi,
!il,
palakkamam peskami.^
{Does
so,
vajjham
edaha dalidda-Caludattaha
evaddhe
yana-samraadde,
ESe 6e
yam
velain
bhave
via
? *
{Looking again)
Kadharn
disani
nava-baladdake
kiraniraittain
mandide dakkhinam
? ^
niadi. ^
Adha
bhavi^Sadi.'*
{Looking round) Kadham Stavalake cede Ma nama tena ido gadua raantabhede kade Ta yava nam annesami. {Descends and comes
!
forward)
Servant.
Executioners.
hodha tunhia,
avinaa-tikkiia-vi^ane du^ta- bailie ido
edi.'*
This character
is
(see
'
^
^ +
hadakka is the usual form also halaa. halaka (in verse) *hrdaka. Textakkhi (Pischel 24). Uidaa insect (Al(aA:a). vi^aganthi ? a plant.
;
'
ahiluhia (abhi-^rtih).
'
+ tya
-*ayattia
press
of
people.'
baladdake
nivadida
'
bull'
(cf.
balivarda).
'!
dahkinam.
caus.).
(ni
+pat).
nivalida
(m + y.r
'
^
^ ^
raantabhede
'
breach of counsel,'
betrayal."
kade
= krto.
dhakkedha
I.
'
dalam 'door'
cf.
(Saur. duaram).
'shut'
from ilhakkedi
'shuts,'
Pali
thaketi
from
-vidana
an O.
'
root
bailie
shut.'
is
horn
"
modern.
bail.'
Candali
sometimes spoken
of as a
aij
an Apabhram^a.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
next extract).
This passage however appears to be in
171
much
Mag-adhi.]
Dialect.
Extract No.
Sakari.
25.
Mrcchakatikam.
(a)
Act
I, V. 18.
paskhalanti
vasu pa^lda na
niali4ai, cyistha
hit
dava
kamena
cyisthn, = tistha,
dajjhadi
me hadake
raanii^a
tavaS^I
khande
and
ii
Grammar
weak y
c
24,
217 quotes
ycistha,
and
in
general a
before c: he
j
also quotes
Markandeya
cyistha
for a
weak y
before
and
in
= c^>am,
yjaa = jaya.
The
spelling
may
^
but
it
may
be noted
cannot be
if
how 'ycistha should be pronounced. We positive how "^ was pronounced in old Magadha
;
it
after
it.
(So the h
in
English
wh does not
or before
The reading
of V'^araruci's rule
XI, 5
179)
is
doubtful, but
it evidently refers to a
method
of pronouncing
paskhalanti (pra
should remain.
Text pakkhalanti.
has cittha, which
is
= S'aur.
'
marissasi.
H. and
(?
P. text
dajjhadi
is
burned.'
dayyhadi).
hadake 'heart,'
the
prose
form
is
hadakke
172
INTRODUCTION TO RRAKRIT.
194
ta.vsbm
= tapasir.
Ia^i
=rdH.
mam^a
= mdmsa.
Verse 21.
Mama maana-raanangam
nisi
vammaha'ii vaddhaanti
askivanti
i
a aanake
me niddaam
pasalai^i
mama va^am
Vammaha so in
has
II
mammalia),
sk.
askivanti
is
becomes
form).
pa^a-
\a,&i = prasarasi
LavanaiSsa
of
Ravana.'
The student
will
probably
change
for r the
Magadhi
or its dialects.
Verse 23.
namake mai
'
kale ayyavi
mam
ka^ika
lasika.
ne^cadi
'
ndnaka coin.' mil^i, stealing.' mosi masca + a^ika fish-eating.' (Text maccha).
'
whip.'
'
dancer.'
ninnaSa 'snub-nosed'
(nir
+ ndsa)
i.e.
'
of
low
caste.
(Text
kamassa = Saur.).
'of her.'
se = Saur. se these.' e^e nom. pi. raasc. mai 'by me.' kala Mg. has also kada and (like
Saur.) kada.
Saur.).
in
Text
is
Magadhi.
Dialect, Dhakki.
Extract No.
26.
Mathura and
Mathurah.
pallnu
paditto
II).
Ta
cittha diila-
'
is
common
/
in
Mg.
stand.
cf.
dhah.
judakaru,
;
nothing about
may
INTRODTCTION TO PRAKKIT.
Gambler.
Jai vajjasi Padalam
jasi,
173
Indam salanam
vi
ca
sampadam
taladi.'
na lakkhidum
bhaa-palivevid' angaa
Esu
vajjadi.
lam panatta
padavi.^
M.
Padima-sunnu
deulu!
(Reflecting)
G.
Ta anusaremha.
M.
Evvam
bhodu.
to
{Both pretend
enter a temple.
with comprehension).
G.
M.
Evvam
bhodu.
Ehi,
Notes.
yudam kalemha.
classes this dialect
Prthvidhara
in
Dhakkl
r),
as
an Apa/
and dental
whether
S.
it
cf.
JM. palana.
cf.
M. has pallia
Mg.
palaida-.
(p. 171).
cyistha.
yeistha above
u like pasalu.
dulat-pa as in H.P.
text
I
is
impossible.
much
like
M. except
for
'
'Ruddo,
rakkliidurp, tarai
have been corrected. (Pischel Gr. 25). i khalantaa (skhal), no evidence whether Dhakkl followed Mg. in the treatment of skh. Text jasam the wrong sibilant, kalentaa pres. part.
;
Text
eso,
but esu
is
established elsewhere.
Mg. would be
e^e.
vippadlvu
= vipratlpah.
:
seems to be a quotation
editions, beginning with
6
devakulam 82. The last sentence hence perhaps the mixture of forms in the
deulu
in Sauraseni.
katthamayl
'
wooden
174
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Features pointing to Apa-
2nd
it
sing, in u.
The MSS.
and
is
Magadhi.
Extract No.
27.
IV).
a spy
who
is
a fellow-country-
Vandinau
sini
Ese
6e
S'ayambhalisala-!^ivila-nive6e.'
kadhaiii
Edasyani*
alaskiyyamana-jaayyande
[laj-ulam
davvam.^
diSadi
?
ke
vi
*
chale
vva
Ta imado eda^sa
sivilas^a saliivam
laularn ca
yanisamha.
Carah A'^caliyam a^caliyam Alio Viggahala3-nalesala-;iilinam avayyandada.^ {Purovalokya) Amha-desiya vva kevi puli^a pc^kiyyandi. Yane vandihim edehim huvidavvam.
: !
Vandinau Bhadda, amhanam Tuluskauam de^iye vva tumam peSkiyyasi. Ta kadhehi Cahamana-^ivila-^alilvarii
:
laulam ca.
Carah
S'unadha
le
vandino
sunadha.
Hage Tuluskalaena
Tani ca d lisanivi
yado tatthastehim
tti
''
idale
puscande
ni[li^kan]de
kiinpi kiiiipi
a palakiye
yaniyyadi.^
Tadhavi raae
paccakkhikadam
'
SakambharUvara
chale
*
divila
= Sibira
=
S.
^
'
YSnidavvani
janidawani.
*
'''
'boundlessness' (aparyantata).
idale
sill
nam
'
of glories
'
6.
idaro;
puscande
S.
pucchanto.
(ntr-fifc^).
ySniyyadi
should be
ySniadi.
"T
niliSkande
= 8.
nirikkhanto
cf.
pralyaknkrtam but
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKEIT.
175
Vandinau
Charah
A^caliam asscaliam
Kadham bhadda,
tattha uva-
pi tae la^kidam.'
daiu.
Sunadha le vandino yadha mae tarn Sivilam niluviHage khu sili-Sbme^ala evam peSkidum vannanda^^a
tarn
tumhanam
yahastam
kadhiyadu.
Maavali-ni;?^Za-kalala-kada8tala-
Tulunganam una laskam. Nalanam una ?/M;;Aa-!5kamanain daha la^kaim ti.' Kim vahuna yampidena ? Tasu kadaas^a pasu-stide aale vi suske bhodi.*^ (Bahum utksipya) Edam ca tam laulum.''
(iti
nam
dar&ayati).
:
Vandinau
Charah
:
Sahu
le
le
cala sahu
Ale
me
Ta hage
vafifiami.'*
nia-stanado ni^ali-da^sa."
Vandinau
Vandinau
Gasca
le
cala ga^ca.
{iti
caro niskrdntah).
(Purato gatvdvalokya)
Tam nidam
laula-duvalam
{Punar
avalokya
sanandam) Ese
se
^aambhalf^ale
astana-stide
pulado disadi.
The Magadhi in this inscription is interesting because it follows more closely than any MS. the rules given by HemaAs the author Somadeva was a contemporary of candra.
cadulide
(?)
*caturite
their cleverness."
la^kidam
= 6.
^
lakkhidarn.
Sotnesvaradeva
may
be the
name
of a prince -paviiiiana a
M. JM. or
,
AMg. ending,
>
*
pa^tidum
prarthayitum.
yathartham.
mada-vari-nirjhara nijjhala
M. nijjhara
should be niyyhala.
for
">
yujjha
is
=
'
yuddha
is
daha
da^a according to
Pischel
"
?
wrong.
host.'
kadaa
(kataka).
Saale
'
ocean.'
niS^alida p. part
from
nii^aladi {nih-^sr).
in class
!).
">
wander.'
*vrajnami
176
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
it
Hemacandra,
may have
been
Some
errors
theless there
Hemacandra,
is
yahastaip, pavi^iilna.
There
of
no reason to suppose that the stage kept up the correct form Magadhi down to the twelfth century, and this probably
M agadhi
that
make
of
fragment
Magadhi
"Avanti."]
Extract No,
28.
and Ddksinntya.
VI).
are jaa-jaamana-candanaa-mahgala-phulla-
bhadda-ppamuha kim acchadha visaddhii jo so govala-darao baddho, bhettunasamain vaccai naravai-hiaam a bandhanam cavi
Ale, puratthime padoli-duare.
ii
Cittha
tumam.
Tumam
Jo
vi
pi
pacchime,
tumam
pi
dakkhine,
Ido
tumain
dava.'
pi uttare.
Ehi Candanaa,
ehi.
Candauakah.
Are
re
Viraa-visalla-Bhimahgaa-dandakalaa-
danda-sura-ppamuha
aacchadha visaddha turiain jatteha lahu karejjaha
Lacchi jena na ranno pahavai gottantaram gantuniH^
'
^aur. acchadlia.
M. bliettuna. vaccai.
is
These
latter
however occur
in
a verse
of
gadua below
ment
i
visalla=ri-^a/)/a.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
avi a,
177
ujjanesu sahasu a
tain tain
Re
re
bbana kassa jamma-chattho jivo navamo tabea surasuo jiante Candanae ko so govala-daraam harai ? *
Virakah. Bhada Candanaa Avaharai kovi turiain, Candanaa, savami tujjha hiaena
jaha addh-uida-dinaare govalaa-darao khudido.^
[Servant.
Yadhagona,
yadha.]''
Candanakah. Are re, pekkha pekkha. Ohario pavahano vaccai majjhena raa-maggassa edam dava viaraha kassa kahira pavasio pavahano
Virakah.
vahehi.
tti.''
Are pavahana-vahaa
arudho
1
Kahim va
turidarn.
vajjai
turiam
6.
jatteha
in forml
6.
jattedha (yatadhvam).
loc. sing,
karejjaha
naarla
common
)
in
M.
verses,
fut. of
(Apa.
joedi 'sees.'
{dyu)
Vyudh
to
"go
for."
jaae
= JS.
is
jayade.
used.
= atra.
caiittho
'
fourth,' S. caduttho.
'
'
(of.
H. chata).
for
ggaho
'
'
planet.'
bhaggava
'
'
gaho bhumi-
suo
*
= Mars.
surasuo
'
tahe&^tathaiva.
'
= Saturn.
6aur. udida
:
5>
addh'uida 'half
risen,'
M. udia(?
removed' (" khanditah ") ? from a root khut. Not the same as S. khudida broken,' = *ksudita for ksumia. (Pischel S 568). 6 The servant speaks Mg. gono bull is the masc. form usual in AMg., Mg. For derivation Pischel suggests *gavana or *gurna. The first seems
read udia).
'
'
'
the
7
'
more probable.
oharia' covered' (opa
'
'
carriage.'
'
(pra + vah).
vaccai
'
goes
(of.
JM.
p. 123, n. 4).
ascertain
(vi
+ car).
pavasio
set
out' {pra-\-vas-=propita).
12
178
[Servant.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
E6e kkhu pavahane
ayya-Caludattaha kelake.
Puspha-kalandaani
Idha
ayyaa
Va^anta^ena
aludha.
niadi.]
Virakah
'
(going
wp
to
Candana).
ajja-Carudattassa
Puppha-karandaam jinnujjanam
C.
niadi 'tti,"*^
Ta gacchadu.
Anavaloido jjeva.
V.
C.
Adha im
V.
C.
Kassa paccaena
Ajja-Carudattassa.
V.
Ko
ajja-Carudatto
vajjai?
Ka
idam
C.
jai
Prthvldhara
s,
possesses
the dental
and m, and
it
is
Mar-
kandeya describes
Such indeed appears to be the character of the dialect as given by the MSS. Candanaka however speaks of himself as a Southerner " vaam dakkhinattha avvatta-bhasino " 'We Southerners
MSS. and Editions have ja and jja for Mg. ya yya. Mg. kelake kerako. puspha (following Homacandra), MSS. vary. Usual reatling puppha. yinnuyyanam old garden.' Here we have the two Mg. genitives side by side.
1
=A
'
=2
There
is
no point
in
servant's dialect
words
naturally he reports to
jonha
'
moonlight.'
'
cau-sSara-saraam
'
-nilii
treasury.'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
speak indistinctly.
179
So Pischel thought
it
danaka spoke AvantI, but more probable that he spoke Dakeinatya (Bharata 17. 48. Sahityadarpana, p. 173. 5). It would
appear that
this
different
vaam dakkhinattha
'
however would be
'
amhe dakkhinacca
Extract No.
'
in Sauraseni.
Jain S'auraseni]
29.
Pravacanasara.
(Portions of this were printed with Sanskrit version by R.
Bhandarkar
in
Appendix
III,
(p.
379
f.)
of
Report on the
Presidency
a complete
Bombay
There
is
Published 1887.
Bom-
bay.
I.
Vira
(69).
Samvat
2438).
Deva-jadi-guru-piijasu veva
danammi va
susilesu
||
Jutto suhena ada tiriyo va manuso ya devo va bhiido tavadakalam lahadi suham indiyam viviham
i
ii
(74).
visaya-
III.
(13).
namuhammi
(18).
pay ado mula-gunesu ya ajo so padipunna-samanno Havadi va na havadi bandho made hi(m) jive'dha kayacetthammi bandho dhuvam uvadhido idi savana chaddiya
ii
i
savvain
(19).
Na
hi niravekkho caii
i
visuddhi
avisuddhassa ya citte
vihiu
11
kaham nu kamma-kkhayo
180
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
cerebral w
is
The
scripts
used
initially
prefer initial
(dental).
The
ya
is
used as in
This Prakrit contains words and forms that are quite foreign
to ordinary
Sauraseni
bub
of
Magadhl.
Perhaps some
(Pischel 21).
veva.
M. upayoga-
= dtmd,
'
i.e.
*dtd,
cf.
atta.
tiriyo
animal
{tiryak).
(74).
(75).
devaddntdndm.
tanha = tanha.
peculiarity
;
This
so
is
is
merely an orthographical
III. (13).
(18).
nanammi
uvadhido
'in knowledge.'
savana idi = iti. abl. of uvadhi (MpadA^). = sramandh, chaddiya should be chaddida (Piscliel vicchaddida, M. vicchad^ 291) = chardita cf.
S'.
dia,
(19).
cdiVi
tydgo JM.
The ending
cf.
vihiu
is
Bombay
Bhasa.]
Extract No.
30.
Svapna -Vasavadattam
Enter the Jester.
Jester.
{Oleefully) Ditthia taitahodo
Prave^akah.
Vaccha-raassa abhippedadittho.
vivahamangala-ramaniy/o
jaiiadi
kalo
Ko
nfuua edaiii
tildise
vayam
una
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
ummajjissamo
tti.'
181
vasiadi,
Idanim pasadesu
andeura-
jmni
khajjianti
tti
an-Acchara-saravaso Utturakuru-vaso
mae
anubhaviadi.'^
aliaro
ria
pek-
khami.^
ca.*
Maid,
ay^a- Vasantao
{Stepping round)
45. is
is
written
in S. India.
(also
ramanlam,
p. 36.
allowed in
Saur.
vayam Saur. has amhe, Daksinatya vaam by Vararuci and Markandeya), AMg. vayam,
'
Pali
vayam.
2
ummajjinamo
we
shall emerge.'
andeura.
for-nt, so
influence
nhaiadi.
anteura is correct (as on p. 24) but MSS. often give -nd "Saundala" for Sauntala. This was probably due to the of Apabhram^a in which the change is common, hnaladi. Saur. The MS. has regularly hn and hm for )ih, mh. At first sight
;
The
spelling
hm, hn however
is
is
found
where nh,
difference
mh
is
amhe, nahais
tako {=snatako)
^Moreover the
Bhasa) bahmano
not very
hma
vaa,y
palama =paramo. No apparent reason for I or Zhere. maiira for mahura (=madhura). This appears to be a mistake, p. 6 has mahura. suumarani = rairn. Neut. Plural in -arii occurs in AMg. JM. .j6. not in M. or
Saur.
3
In Pali
it
Here again
antiis
as in ayyaiitta,
Hemacandra
The
spelling
occa-
Indian MSS.
]\Iost
^c^
jja, or is
(Pischel
284).
In the
jja.
no authority
for Saur.
jaha
*
is
mistake,
If
it
is
not a
182
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
.4/imo eso Vasantao.
(Approaches) Ayya\
Vasantaa!
annesasi
Ko
?
kalo
Jester.
tnmara annesami.'
!
mam
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
Jester.
Ahmanam bhattim bhanadi-avi hnddo jamaduo Kim nimittam bhodi, pucchadi ? Kim annam ? sumana-vannaain anemi tti.
Hnado
toWabhavam.
tti.'^
Savvam
?
anedu
bhodi vajjia
bhoanani.
Maid.
Jester.
Adhannassa
mama
khi-parivatto samvutto.^
Maid.
Jester.
Gacchadu bhodi.
Java aham
Exeunt.
vi
tattahodo.
Saasam
gacchami.*
(Enter
Padmavati
with
retinue
and Vasavadatta
wearing
Avanti
Maid.
dress.)
Kimnimittam
va na
vetti.^
!
Padma.
ddyii
Maid.
Bhatti-darie
tani
nama,
paval '-antari-
Padma.
Maid.
Hala jadi evvam, kira danim vilambesi ? Tena hi imassim sila-vattae muhuttaam upavisadu bhatti-daria. Java aham vi kusumavacaam karemi.^
!
'
Ahmo
is
usual spelling
ammo,
ammo.
see
amme,
p. 10 htis
jamaduo
kukkhi
Java
is
CO.
belly.'
here,
ahampi would
be better.
6
guhmaa
for
reason
gulmaka") AMg. 6. Mg. yurama ^ 4S. There seems no " the spelling with hm. In the previous Act " guhmadu
{''
is
not archaic.
sil5-pattaka).
Hlapattaka 'stone
slab.'
(On
p.
3<i,
uvavisadu
is
correct 6aur.
So correctly uvarada,
p. 40.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
183
Padma.
Vasava.
Ayyel
Kim
ettha.
Mpavisamo
Evvam
hodu.
(They both
sit
down).
[The words in
italics
Translation.
Jester.
Hurrah
We
in an
like
this
after being
?
in the sink,
we
shall
come up again
At present
meats
while
is
Nymph
to keep
may enjoy the arctic regions, without me company There's one thing about
!
a
it
that's very
bad
though
a
my
couch
Bah
to
?
it's
and
no
breakfast
Wherever
is.
has
worthy
Vasantaka got
Why
I
here he
My
was
you looking
for
me
Maid.
Jester.
Maid.
Our mistress says Why do you ask lady What do you think ?
am
of course.
Jester.
Maid.
Jester.
Why
my
of
cuckoo.
Maid.
Jester.
so.
well.
I will just
go to His Highness.
Maid.
Why
has
my
mistress
come
to Cupid's grove
184
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Ah,
I
Padmavati.
Maid.
am
looking to see
if
in flower or not.
They are
in flower,
madam, with
young
leaves.
Padma.
Maid.
Ah If that is so, why do you delay ? Wont your ladyship sit on this stone
!
seat
while
Padma.
Vasava.
Pali.]
My
good
girl
so.
Why
should we
sit
here
Let us do
Extract No.
31.
Jataka
Vol. Ill, p. 17).
308.
Java-sakuna-jatakam.
Atite Baranasiyam Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto
Athgalo
mamsam
laggi,
na
sakkoti,
khara
vedana
Fara?m5?/a?n = A Mg. Vanarasle. Brahma-Pkt. bamkarente causal participle, S'. karente is active, rukkha " woodpecker " rukkha so in M. S'., etc. ruksa Vedic "tree" doubtless related to vrksa whence M. JM. vaccha(Pischel 320). hutva = S'. bhavia, AMg. hotta. nibbatti " was born again" aor. (nir + vri) from nibbatti = 8'. nivvattadi.
ha.
,
Atha=S'. adha.
from laggadi.
pass, aor:
siha so in M. (65).
ud-dhumayi
S'.
ganhitum = S'.
sakkei.
genhidum.
sakkoti =
sakkunoti.
JM. sakkai,
vat-
Atha nani so sakuno gocara-pasuto disva sakhaya nilino samma dukkhatiti " pucchi. So tarn atthaiii acikkhi " Ahan te samma etarn atthiiii apaneyyaiii, bhayena te
'*
kin te
mukham
pi
man "
ti
" nia
khadami,
jlvitani
medehiti."
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Notes.
prasita.
185
seekincr (food)
i\a,m
him.'
M.
of
loc.
S'.
disva = drsiva, AMg. dissti, dissa, dissani. Sakhaya cf. nialaa. nilliio " perched" past part. pas.s. of niifyati
nillamana.
samma
'"
friend,
good sir"
from sninyak.
"told" acikkhati {a + khyd redupUcated) = Amg. apaneyyam "I would remove" S'. would be avaneam, AMg. avanejja. visahami (vi + sah) "dare."
acikkhi
aikkhai.
So
"sadhu"
ti
tarn
kiiii
mukham
pidahitum na sakAtthi
passa =
pasa.
nipajjapetva gerund
infin.
of causal
'
from
'
nipajjati
{ni + pad).
pidahitum
'
from pidahati
shuts
{{0)^1 dha).
niliyi 'perched
dati.
Siho nirogo hutva ekadivasam vana-mahisam vadhitva khaSakuno " vimamsissami nan" ti tassa uparibhage sa:
Akaramhase
migaraja
te
kiccam
yam
balani ahuvamhase,
namo ty-atthu, api kifici labhamase. Notes. vimamsissami fut. of vimamsati "examine, try" (mimamsate). pathama = Pkt. padhama. akaramhase imperfect (or aorist) atm. ahuvamhase the same from bhavati. try-athu = (t7i -i-asiw). labhamase imperative atm.
Tarn sutva siho dutiyam gatham aha
:
Mama
dant'antara-gato santo
tam bahum
yani hi jivasiti
akatannum akattaram katassa appatikarakam yasmim kataiinuta n' atthi nirattha tassa sevana. Yassa sammukha-cinnena mittadhammo na labbhati anusuyyam anakkosam sanikam tamha apakkame ti.
Evara vatva so sakuno pakkami.
186
Notes.
karoti.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
bhakkha
luddani
'
'feeding on.'
kubbanto
abhasi
pres. part, of
'
cruelties.'
'
(lubdha).
'
spoke
'
aor.
'
of bbasati.
kataniiu
so,
grateful
(krtajna).
-cinna
'
performed
in a person's
'
presence,
personal
kindness."
like
is
sanikam
quickly.'
Sometimes
means
'slowly'
'gently, softly.'
tamha
(tasmdt)
used adverbially in
S'.
Pali].
Extract No.
32.
Jataka
(Fausboll. Vol. Ill, p. 126.
339.
Bdveru jataka.
Atite Baranasiyain Brahmadatte rajjam karente Bodhisatto iiiora-yoniyam
arailne vicari.
nibattitva
vuddliim
anvaya sobbagga-patto
kira kale
Baverurattharn agamamsu.
Tasmim
Baveruratthe
nisinnani disva " passath' imassa cbavivannam gala-pariyosanam mukhatundakani mani-gulaka-sadisani akkhiniti " kakam ev'^a pasamsitva te vanijake ahatnsu "imam ayyo sakunam amhakani detha, amhakam bi imina attbo, tumhe attano
:
'
'
ti.
"Nadema"
ti
ti.
Anupub-
vutte
'
tumbebi pana saddbim raetti botu " ti kabapanasatam gabetva adanisu. vuddhim anvaya " attaining full growtb " geruud {ami + i)
formed by analogy witb maya from mi, instead
of
*anvetva.
ekacce
'
certain
3,
'
{*eka-tya-) disa
aor.
kakam
'
foreign crow.'
kila.
mamsu,
plur.
"went."
Kira =
sea, in a
"passers
'
by,
spectators."
kupa
'mast.'
ni-
sinnam perched passatha, 2nd plur. imperat. "look at." -pariyosanam "at the end of" {paryavasdna)
= JM. nisinna.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
" termination.
'
187
' '
'
Sirs
'
= S'.
Te
-ajja.
Kahapana
gahetva
metti
"friendship."
tarn
pakkhipitva
nanappa-
rattharp
agamamsu.
phalaphala "wild fruits." Pali often lengthens a vowel when a word is repeated in a compound, so khandakhandam " in
pieces," kiccakiccani "all sorts of duties."
aor.
patijaggimsu,
{prati
pati-jaggati
'
"watch
'
over,
'
'
look
after"
+ jagr)
:
samannagato
endowed with
is
the
equivalent of this
found
in
Buddhist Sanskrit,
yasagga
"height of glory." puna-vare "the next time." acchara " snapping of the fingers." vassati " screams " x^'va&. They
had trained
it
to
-utter
nicchareti "emit,
'
Manussa tam disva somanassa-jata " etam ayyo sobhaggapattam susikkhita-sakuna-rajanam amhakam detha " ti aham" Amhehi pathamam kako anito, tarn ganhittha, idani su.
etam mora-rajanara anayimha, etam pi yacatha, tumhakam ratthe sakunanam nama gahetva agantuni na sakka " ti " Hotu ayyo, attano ratthe afinarn labhissatha, imam no detha" ti
mulam vaddhetva
ratana-vicitte
sahassena
ganhirpsu.
Atha nam
satta-
panjare
thapetva
macchamamsa-phalaphalehi
Tassagatakalato pat'
labhagga-yasagga-ppatto
jato.
na
ti
icchati.
188
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
'\vou
is
took."
ahamsu aor. "they said." ganhittha 2, plur. anayimha " we have brought." sakka "it
Sometimes
{
pos-
sible."
this can
'able'
= iakyah),
but
it
is
and Pischel
13'J.
come and
thaS'.
of
petva = AMg.
thavia, thavia.
thavetta,
JM.
patthaya
" from
"
lit.,
"
"
{'pra-'r
stha), so
ajjapatthaya
"from
this
day forth."
parihayi "
fell
off."
can
we
find
kajjabhojjam.
caw."
ukkarabhumi "
Palil
Extract No.
33.
Mahavamsa, Bk.
VII.
Conquest of Ceylon.
(Dines Anderson's Reader, p. 110.
Geiger's trans, p. 55).
of
The Buddha at his decease informed Indra that Vijaya son King Sihabahu had gone to Lanka with seven hundred
and asked that he and
his followers
followers,
should be care-
fully protected.
to Visnu.
V.
6.
7.
V.
6.
"
vutta
p.p. p.
from
" so
in
JM. AMg.
{matra),
Pkts. have
kam
V.
7.
agamma gerund of Jigacchati. sajju" quickly " derived from sadyah. vesena " in
"
(of
the disguise
-ppamukha
followers.'
'
with
at their head,'
i.e.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT,
V.
8.
189
" na
iti
hessati vo
bhayam "
nisinciya
9.
10.
Eko
*'
anvaga
iti.
11.
nama yakkhini
12.
13.
Varifi ca
14.
so naro.
Tam
hessati,
also
fut.
common.
V.
9.
suttam, e.g. as a protection against evil sprits, agama, aor. " vanished"; also agami, agacchi, agamasi, etc.
dassesi
iayati.
"there appeared,"
soni " bitch."
aor.
cf.
dasseti
= dar-
V. 10.
vunati.
" dogs
"
{iunakdh)
" only
shoots"
it
anvaga
"followed."
sunakha
a village."
where there
is
V.ll.
V. 12.
= disva,
also passitvana.
mulalayo,
{mrndli).
of
V. 13.
So Reader has
the
sa but
tank
not
the
is
yakkhini.
alhabaddho "fast
also
bound."
V. 14.
alhaka
sakkuni
aor.
sakkunati
asakkhi from
thread,"
i.e.
sakkati.
paritta-sutta
"protection
V.15.
"thread charm" or "magic thread." ada " he did not give." khipi " hurled."
nada = na
190
V. 16.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Anayantesu sabbesu vijayo bhayasankito
raddhapaficayudho gantva disva pokkharanim subbani
17.
18.
"kim
19.
rajaputta
me gahita nil " ti cintiya me bboti tuam " iti aba tain, bbaccebi, piva nabaya " ty-aba aa.
:
mama
jatin
"
ti
niccbito
dhanum sandbay'
so
upagato.
21.
vamabattbena kesesu gabetva dakkbinena tu ukkbipitva asira aba: "bbacce me debi dasi, tam maremiti," bbayuttba sa jivitam yaci yakkbini:
*'
22.
Jivitam debi
me
sami,
raj jam
dassami
te
abam,
24.
Adubbattbaya sapatbam so tam yakkbim akarayi, " Anebi bbacce sigban " ti vuttamatta va sa nayi. " Ime cbata " ti vutta sa tanduladi viniddisi
bhakkbitanam vanijanam navattbam vividbam babuni
Bbacca
te
25.
anayanta " not coming." naddha " fastened, equipped witb." apassa " wbere be saw no footstep of
is
a sandbi consonant.
bhoti "Lady."
sa-namam "bis name." savetva, gerund, caus. of sunoti. sandhaya "making ready-drawing" also
sandbetva,
sandabitva,
.
from
sandabati,
sandbeti
{sam + dha)
V.20.
V. 21
.
bhayattha = bhaya-sthd.
-kiccam
{Icrtyam) so in S.
V. 22.
V.23.
adubhatthaya.
chata " bungry "
(vi
viniddisi
"sbowed"
+ nir +
di6)
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
191
Old Prakrit
Extract No.
34.
Hathigumpha
This Inscription
is
Inscription.
in
one
of the
from Cuttack.
written
cent. B.C.'
reign
The inscription gave a summary of Kharavela's Unfortunately it is very fragmentary. year by year.
the case with Asoka's inscriptions, double consonants
As
are
is
written single,
but
tliey
the
forms should
is
to
it
the
student.
The
difference
only
orthographic, once
intended.
(1)
Namo Arahantanam
Namo savva-Siddhanam
Verena
maharajena maha-megha-vahanena.
tena Kalingadhipatina
verena, = virena.
Ceta-raja-vamsa-vaddhapandarasa-vassani
pandarasa = Pali
pannarasa.
It
is
Pali,
AMg.
remarkable
Salutation to
all
Siddhas.
For
bearing
lauded and auspicious marks, and endowed with the four internal virtues.
Early History of India,' 2nd Edition. Xotes on and 196. Fleet, J.R.A.S. 1910, p. 242 and p. 824. Follows that of Bhagwanlal Indraji, with some slight modifications.
Vincent Smith,
'
102
(2)
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Tato lekha-rijpa-ganana-vavahara-vidhi-visaradena sav-
raj jam.
Then
he enjoyed
power
as
heir-apparent,
(?)
and excellent at
all
learning.'
(3)
Sanipuiina-catuvisati-vasso
ca
dwaua-dharamena
sesa-
maharajabhisecanarn papunati.
Danava. In his Sanskrit version Bh. gives danena ca and he translates " hy peace and religious policy," but he records
no doubt about the reading given as above, except that he
leaves a space in the plate
between na and
va.
papunati, Pali
papunati.
And wiien he had completed twenty-four years, according to Danava law (?) in a generation of the Kalinga royal family,^ that he might pass the rest of his manhood in conquests, he
was
installed as
Maharaja.
(4)
pakara-nivesanam
patisamkharayati
Kalinga-nagarim
khibi-
padhama.
'royal
'tanks.'
Palipathama.
sitala
S*.
etc.
padhama.
padi
Pali
khibira(i{6j>a).
camp.'
read
sitala.
(pali)
'dike'
Bh.
panatlsa JM.
panatisa,
paiicatinisam.
pakashould
We
expect pakatiye.
Compare Biihler. Indian Studies N'o. Ill, p. 13. Bh. "in the i/oke of the (previous) personages of the royal dynasty The meaning of this is not clear. If the reading is correct, of Kalinga." it would appoar that a Kalinga prince could not become MaharSja until he was 24.
'
193
first year being barely installed he repaired Kalinga and the cantonment with the gates, walls and dwellings injured by the wind, had built cool tanks and dikes, and had
city
all
thirty-five
lakhs, artd
thus
KusamKusam-
banam khattiyanam ca
abhittayitta,
gerund
Reading
from
banam not
numerous
Masika(?).
(6)
quite certain.
army
of
horses,
elephants,
(he)
men and
chariots.
Assisted by the
Kusamba Kshatriyas
natta-gita-vaditta-samdassanahi ussava-samaja-karapanahi
karapana as in Pali
'
a causing to be made.'
amused the
city
by exhibitions
of
dampa
(?)
dancing, music,
The
reign.
inscription continues
up
In
who
apparently deserted
hi-s
among the people of Magadha Magadhanam ca vipulam bhayam janeto) made his elephants drink
having severely punished the king of Magadha made him bow at his ieet{Magadham ca, rajanam
the Ganges, and
patisasitta
of
bahu
pade va(n)dapayati).
13
/
/
194
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Old Magadhi.]
Extract No.
35.
The long vowels and double consonants are not shown in the The inscriporiginal in the Jogimara cave on Ramgarh Hill. The dialect appears to be tion is in Old Brahmi characters. Old Magadhi. The meaning of lijpadakkhe {rupadakso) is doubtful: " skilled in painting " "sculptor" ci. {rupakrt) ha,ve
been suggested.
Balanaeye
'
belonging to Benares.'
'
Ka-
Liiders.
Survey
INDEX OF EXAMPLES.
[This index comprises moat of the examples given in Part I,
and
of the
words explained
in Part
11]
anavayagga,
146, n.
1.
AMg.,
'
'
endless,'
p.
a,
'
and,'
3.
anavaraya, JM.,
incessant,' p. 129,
aam,
'this,' 110.
(AMg.
125. 64.
aj^am).
n. 2.
cf.
mhi.
ainsu,
'
Also assu.
p. 120,
H.
asu.
'
akaannua,
V. 83.
'
'ungrateful,'
p. 146, n.
1.
aniada,
53.
'
uncertain,' p. 87, n. 6.
6.,
*
akanda, unexpected,' p. 93, n. 5. akayya, Mg. (akarya), p. 165, n. 2. akarimsu, aor., they did,' 133. akasi, AMg., he did,' 133. akkhala, Mg. letter,' p. 165, n. 1. akkhi, eye,' 40 Pb. akkh. H.
'
anU2;ejjha,
to be
favoured,'
27.
anudiahaijl,
'
day by day,'
'
anuraa,
'
affection,' 9.
p.
'
'
akh. cf. acchi. agada, a well,' p. 123, n. 2. anguliaa, rmg,' p. 90, n. 6. aggala, ' bolt,' p. 136, v. 19. aggahattha, finger,' p. 101, v. 4. aggi, 'fire,' 36, 62, 88. Pb. agg.
' ' '
110. 111.
'
annunna=annonna
73.
one another,'
annesana,
annesidum,
atta,
'
H.
ag.
'
aggha,
valuable,' 56.
'
44.
attia,
p. 123, n. 9.
39.
'
'
acchariam,
aechi,
(3)
weapon,'
bone,'
cf.
56 (astra).
58.
atthi,
38, 132.
atthi.
' eye,' cf. akkhi 39. acchiim, acchi ni, M. plur. , i acchera, M. =accharia, 76.
(2)
(3) -arthi,
JM.
adidhi,
addhii,
'
ajja (1) to-day,' 44. Apa. jju. Pb. ajj. Old H. aju. H. aj.
'
adda, *wet,'
3.
adha,
n. 2."
'
then,'
6.,
7.
adhannada,
:'.
misfortune,' p. 88,
'
ajjaiifcta, 'gentleman,'
AMg.
{-adhyatmika).
p. 83,
of,'
antakkarana,
'
conscience,'
82.
51.
'determined,'
andharia, darkened,'
apavagga, JM.,
'final
beatitude,'
atthae,
atithi,
AMg.,
1.
'on
account
p. 135, n.
1.
p. 147, n.
appa, appa,
known,'
cf.
'small,'
'
37.
self,'
36,
100.
H. 5p.
3.
atta.
'
appatta,
unobtained,' p. 114, v.
196
appia
(1)
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
not dear,' 6.
sent,'
auso,
136, V. 23.
AMg.
JM.
*
,
'
(2)
JM.,p.
n. 4.
second,'
Sojja,
aohana,
p. 109(e).
2.
7.
abbhantara,
'
interior,' 43.
,
agada, 6.=aftda,
agantum,
2.
abbhahia (=:abhy-adhika)
JM.
'
'
having
come,'
5.
amiam,
107.'
p. 123, n. 9.
9.
amham,
AMg., JM.,
acaria,
'
teacher,"
'
amhakera, 'our,'
amhe,
ariha,
alasi,
'
applied,"
58.
125,.
worth,'
57.
cf.
anatta,
ania,
anida,
'
ordered,"
*
125
wandering mendicant.'
23.
anavedi,
S.
'
orders,'
36.
brought,'
, '
125.
Ji
brought,'
'
125.
anesu,
125.
bring,'
avanida,
'
taken away,'
'
ane, (na
'p.
ane)
(c).'
116. I (don't)
know,'
avattha,
condition,'
17.
38.
108
H.
aur.
Rom-
adhappai, caus. pass, adha, 135(c). abhioia, abhiogiya, AMg.. -of the
state ?' p. 145, n.
9. 57.
.
passive.
'
apa + radh,
52.
amarisa,
afternoon,'
'
'
impatience,
'
avaranha,
avaratta,
AMg.,
'
araddha,
of
begun,'
12
'
latter
half
1.
arabbhai.
125.
'
arambhadi.
is
begun,'
avassam,
avahga,
v. 61.
'
'
116,
alekkha,
avajjia,
'
JM.
'
avatta,
p.
112
(o).
V. 6.
asesa,
asoga,
'all,' 20.
11.
aveia,
'
announced,'
'
asa,
110.
cf.
assa,
assu,
'
(1)
(2)
'of liim,'
'
= assa.
,
AMg.,
92.
horse,'
49.
cf.
M. asa.
asi,
was,'
'
133.
tear,' 04.
6.
amsu. adha.
asiadi, 6.
sits
ahamsu, AMg..
133.
overlordship,'
abinava,
ahinnana.
new,' token,'
13.
p. 90. n. 3.
aada,
'
a(y)ava,
ikkhu,
7.
sugar-cane,'
40.
cf.
aai>a, (I)
ucchu.
icchai,
n. 4.
'
promi.ses,'
JM.,
p.
128,
9.
p. 130,
li.
1.
'
icehe, iddhi,
'
AMg.,
'
increase,' p. 146, n.
6.
aihl, Apa.,
in
the beginning.'
93.
iijiarp,
this,'
71.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
woman,' p. 84, n. 1. idha. here,' 28. the rainbow, in indaalammi,
itthi,
'
197
umtnuha,
'
'
looking up,' 46. ure, on the breast,' p. 117, v. 76. ullavida, 'shouted out,' p. 93,
p. 113(b).
n. 12.
'
imise,
AMg. =imie.
of this,' fern.
uvaarana,
n. 16.
'
aid,' 17.
'
uvacchandido,
desirest,' 116.
60.
coaxed,'
p.
90,
sage,'
'
UVajjhaa,
'
teacher,'
17, 44.
iha,
here,'
28.
=idha.
n.' 5.
uvaraa,
'
colouring,' p. 101, n. 4.
'
idisa,
isisi,
'
'
uvari,
'
p. 99, n.
4.'
U
Uia,
uvasampajjai, AMg., 'gets to,' -ittanam, ab^ol. , p 147, n. 4. uvahara, oblation,' p. 100, n. 5. uvaiya, JM. 'offering' p. 128,
'
,
n. 4.
ua, 'lo!,' M.,p. 103, v. 4. water,' 10. iiatthia {=upa-sthita), p. 118, v. 78. uaroa. ill-will,' p. 136, v. 10. ocean.' p. 114, v. 56. tiahi, uahiu.M., abl., 93. uida, fitting.' p. 95, n. 2. ukkara, multitude,' p. 94, 10.
' ' ' '
'
uvalahissam,
p. 83, n. 9.
'
will
reproach,'
p.
UVvatta, 'turned
V. 56
over,'
114,
uvvigga,
usu, AMg.,
'
'
ukkhitta,
thrown
'
41.
Uggama,
' '
rising,' 34.
'
U
usava,
'
uggahihi, will sing,' p. 120, v. 84. uccoda, withering ? p. HO (a). ucehii, M., ' sugar-cane,' 40, 70 H. ikh. E.H. ukh. cf. 6. ikkhu. Mar. us. Bg. akh.
festival,'
41, 63.
usasa = ussasa.
E
in this,' 47. ' in this state,' p. 1 10 (c). e(y)aruva, AMg., ' of this form,' p. 145, n. 2.
'
ujjala,
ujjaij.a,
'
blazing,' 42.
'
eassim,
eavattham,
ujjua,
'
ujjoviya, lighted up,' p. 159, n. 14. ujjhida, (JM., ujjhiya). 'left behind,' p. 129, n. 11.
ei,
'
goes,'
'
)2.
15, 112.
ekka,
one,'
JM.
ega.
Guj.
unhu.
Mar. un.
utta, spoken,' 125. uttinna, traversed,' 125. utthahgia, M., supported,' p. 114,
'
'
70.
cf. ei.
61.
12, 132.
132.
edihasia,
enti,
'
'
legendary,'
'
V. 56.
utthedu,
n. 8.
'
let
him stand
up,' p. 97,
erisa, like this," 24, 70. evaddhe, Mg., so great,' (evadda, JM.). n. 4.
'
p.
170,
uppala,
'
'
lotus,' 34.
v. 3.
'
evvam,
eso,
'
'
thus,' 68.
this,'
110.
198
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kadharp,
kaham.
6..
how?'
14.
M.
oSsa, M., space," p. 114, v. 3. oinna, ' descended,' 125. Also odinna. onavia, bent down,' 25. otthaya, covered with." p. 159,
' '
'
kadhedu,
75.
' '
'
let
him
tell.' 11.
14.
n. 15.
odaria,
'
122.
Mg.
odalia.
olagga,
n. 9.
followed,'
p.
124,
16.
kadhesu. tell,' 116. kanta, gone,' 125 (kram). kappa, age, etc.,' 37. kappadiya, JM., 'pilgrim,'
'
p.
123,
n. 10.
'
oviya,
osaria,
'
kamala,
(l) (2)
'
'
osaha,
oharia,
20.
karaala,=.E'afcwz, p. 112
karamagara,
p. 127, n. 5.
JM..
'workman,'
(karmagneh),
?
'
kammaggino,
93.
JM.
'
i
kaa,
S.
done,'
'
125.
JM., kaya,
p.
60.
kammi, M.
V. 76.
what
p.
117,
kaa-ggaha,
V. 64.
117,
karanijia
done,'
(S.
'
karania),
'
to
be
137.
Kaanta,
n._6.
'
kaall-hara,
karandaa.
karidurn,
karitta,
'
AMg.,
' '
having done,'
122.
karissam,
1.
kariadi,
kariadu,
69.
'
let it
5.
karedi,
kado,
kae,
'
145,
n. 2.
16.
kakkola =kankota,
kahkamaa, JM.,
bill,' p.
'like
heron's
karesu, -do,' 116. kalemi, Mg.. I do,' p. 166, n. 2. kalevara, body,' 18. kallakallim,' everv morning,' p. 150,
' '
knla).
n. 6.
'
19.
kajjai,
AMg.,
' '
'
is
done,'
135.
Note.
kavala, mouthful,' 18, p. 108 kavala, Apa., lotus,' 25. kavalia, eaten,' p. Ill (/). kavada, door-panel,' p. 101, n.
'
' ' *
(b).
6.
kflt;tkkha, side glance,' p. 1 12 (g). kadaa, JM., fetter,' p. 129, n. 7. kadua, bitter,' p. 87, n. 5. kadhia, boiled,' 6. kadhida, 42.
'
kavva,
kasana,
'
'
'
kaha,
kaham, how
' '
'
p. 102, V. 2,
14.
'na,
'
gold,' p. 101, n. 6.
p.
1 1 1
kahS.
(d).
kanakkania,' resounding,'
kantha, neck,' 3J. kaQna, ear,' 48. kanha, =krma, 47. knda, see kaa.
' '
kabiqi
kaatthaa
kaiirp,
where,' p. 81, n.
'
1.
knhissam,
(1) (2)
?
"
M.,
136.
'
to do,'
'
121.
AMg.,
having done.'
122.
kadama, kadara,
111.
'
which
69,
knuna, M.,
'
having done,'
kadhaissnip,
kaduip,6. Mg..'
136.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
kamae =kamyaya,
'
199
'
48. 128.
moonlight,'
kfilake, Mg., 'door,' p, 165, n. 2. kSlana, Mg. =karanat, p. 166, n. 3. kaham, ' I will do,' 134.
khaa,
(l)
-hurt khada,
KH a
wound.'
^.
125, p. 110(6).
kim una,
'
what then
?,' 3.
(2)
'dug,' 125.
S.khanida'inlaid,'
kinkini, 'bell,' p. Ill (d). kicca, AMg., ' having done,' p. 147,
n. 7.
khaia,
(^
'
khacida),
p.
109 (a).
khagga,
'
131. 11.
57.
khajjai,
'
is
khanna,
kilanta,
'
weary,'
khatta.
Khattia,= Ksatriya,
40.
14.
khammai,
khavia.
125.
'
M
' '
prepared,'
,
'
i9.
is
is afflicted,'
khai, Apa.=khaai,
kivina,
kirai,
'
wretched,'
of
?
60.
?
'
khama,
70.
kidlsa,
kisa,
'
what
'
sort
khara,
khijjai,
'
is
done,'
'
135.
'
is
'
why
kuo, JM.,
khinna,
1.
khitta,
khippai,
n. 7.
'
kukkhi, 6 kucchi, M.
'
'
40. kucchio, AMg., kucchi rnsi, loc. , 93. kujja, AMg., he may do,' 133. kuttedi, Mg. has cut,' p. 166, n. kudila, crooked,' 16. kudumba, household,' 16.
, '
khippam
khividum,
AMg.,
'quickly,'
136.
p. 146, n. 5.
5.
to throw,'
40.
'
khina,
'
wasted,'
H. chin,
'
khu,
'
particle,'
'
74. 6, 34.
6, 22.
kunai,
n. 5.
'
does,'
khujja,
hump-back,'
(
khel. khel
play
'),
angry,
G
gaa (6. gada) gaana, 'sky'
n.
i.
'
kuppadi,
n. 5.
'
is
'
kumbhanda,
kumbhilaa,
n.
1.
'
{gagana),
92.
'
p.
101,
Mg.
thief,'
p.
165,
gaammi= grafe.
V. 14.
kulta,
ga(y)ava(y)a, JM.,
aged,' p. 136,
81.
kuvida,
gainda,
'
lord of elephants,'
(l)
kuwam,
'
kuvvamane atm.
'
103. p. 146, n. 9.
gaccha,
'go,' gats.
116.
Kash.
kera, to be done,' 76. keria, belonging to,' p. 99, n. 8. kerisa=kidisa, 24, 70. Mg.,
keli^e.
(2)
JM.,
"school-sect,"
p. 136, V. 23. gacchahi, AMg., ' go,' 116. gacchittae, AMg., inf., 136. ganthi, ' knot,' 55.
kelake, Mg.
n. 6.
'
belonging
to,' p. 167f
gando,
n."3.
'
night-watchman
'
'
p. 122,
kevali, AMg., ' absolute ledge,' p. 145, n. 3. kesesu, (Mg. keieSu), 21.
know-
ganta, AMg.,
having gone,'
go,'
122.
136.
gantum,
'to
'
121,
konca,
'
gamissadi, will go,' 134. gamiadi. 6. passive, is gone,' M. gammai, 119, 125. 119.
'
200
garala.
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
poison,' p. 110
*
(6).
cakka,
p.
13fi,
wheel,'
45.
garua,
V. 13.
heavy,'
71.
'
garukkha, JM.,
full
of,'
Sindhi caku.
p. 122, n. 4.
Garuda, 6.=Garula, M.
Mg.,'22
gallakka, gavittha, gahavai,
n. 8.
' '
Galuda,
cakkavatti,
cakkhusa,
'
crystal,' 50.
'
eanga,
'
'
beautiful,' p. Ill
'
(c).
caccara, square,' p. 124, n. 10. cadavia, increased,' p. 123, n. catta, abandoned,' 119.
'
12.
125.
cattari,
'
four,' 112.
cadukka, ^.
38.
(caiikkaM.),' square',
'
gai,
'
sings,' il27.
*
gam a,
village,' 45.
cf.
25 end. esteemed,'
oceans,' 61.
cammaraa,
cai,
'
gijjai,
is
sung,'
ginhium, AMg.,
note.
giddha,
giddh.
'
vulture,'
47.
Pb.
gimha,
giha,
gia,
'
H. gidh. summer,'
cava, ' bow,' p. 109 (e). cia, 'like,'p. 114,v. 3; p. 117, v. 75. ciiicaia, ' adorned,' p. 130, n. 4.
Citthni,
Mar. dia7.
M.
(6.
citthadi).
Mg.
lect, glm.
' house,' p. 152, n. sung,' 125. guttha, ' strung,' p. Ill {/). '
AMg.,
cisthadi, 'stands,' 7. citthittae, AMg., inf., 130. cinai, ' collects,' 131. cinijjai, pass., 135.
gumma,
'
bunch,'
48.
einedi,
cf.
'
6.
'collects,'
128,
13
1.
cinai (cinoti).
'
einha,
n.
4.
inf., 136.'
, '
'
house,' p. 152. n. geha, JM goccha, M., bush,' 71. gotthi, JM., society,' p. 136,
'
cittaphalaam,
'
picture tablet,'
135.
5.
v. 23.
GH
ghadanta,
v.' 6.
'
p. 167, n.
I.
joining with,' p.
CUUna,
n. 8.
'lime,' p.
102, n.
3.
H.
n.'3.
101.
6.
n. 5.
ghettum,M.
V. 14.
cf.
'
gheppai,
is
CH
Cha, M. AMg.,
* '
caai, M.,
112.
loo.
81.
chai;ii;La,
'
hidden,' p. 91, n. 5.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
chammuha,
chaa,
'
201
'colour,' etc., p. 97, n. 6; p. 102, n. 2. chane (?), p. 119, v. 81. chava, AMg., 'child, etc' Pali
jivvai, is conquered,' 135. jiha, ' tongue,' 54. juai, ' young women,' p. 109 (e). juarao, heir apparent,' 99, note,
'
juala,
'
pair,'
'
9.
-AMg.
juvala,
p. 146, n. 10.
2.
juguccha,
jugga,
'
jealousy.'
39.
is split,' p.
*
109
(a).
pair,' 36.
'
ehinna,
chindai,
130.
jujjadi,
'
is
joined,'
119,
129,
(6
,
'
chindadi),
cuts,'
135.
jujjha,
jujjh.
'
battle,' p. 128. n. 7.
Pb.
chuhai, JM. throws,' p. 124, n. 6. chuha, M., hunger,' 39. chea, a cut,' p. 116, v. 62. cheetta, AMg.. ' having cut,' p. 146,
'
H. jujh.
'
junjai,
joins,'
125.
.34,
jutta,
'
'
joined,'
'
125.
10.
judiaro,
gamester,' p. 97, n.
n. 10.
cut,'
p. 146, n. 10.
who,'
'
110.
if,'
S 1-
J auna= Yamuna,
25.
p.
110(6).
jovvana,
'
janna,
'
sacrifice,' 36.
jadha
Mg. yadha), (M. jaha. 'a3,'l, 14. jappia, babbled,' 37. jampia, JM., 'said,' p. 129, n. 9. jampimo, we speak,' 69.
'
JH
jhanajhananta,' jingling,' p.
jhai,
'
HI (d).
6.
reflects,' 127.
'
jhana,
meditation,' p. 96, n.
40.
'
jhma=khina,
Jambu.
jalai,
35.
'
TH
80.
thai,
jaladda,
'
'running
with
water,'
p. Ill (b).
made
to
134.
jaha =jadha,
14, i8.
'
thia
(6.
thida),
thidi), Also thii.
'
jaa
(6.
ja(y)a,
n. 5.
125.
also thia.
p.
122,
thii
(6.
standing-state,'
38.
is
jaadi,
bom,'
' '
125. 115.
janae. atm.
knows,'
jada, 6. jamadua,
jalaula,
V. 17.
'
p. 129,
n. 8.
'
'
dasai,
125.
doya,
dapper
, wines,' 125, 131. old,' p. 97, n. 11. jibbha, AMg., tongue,' 54.
'
M.
'
jinna,
DH
H.
dhakkedi,
'
'
shuts,' p. 170, n.
7.
9.
jibh.
dhanka,
'
crow,'
202
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
nitthavana,
V. 11.
'inflection,'
p.
136.
naa,
'
bent,'
S.
125.
(6.
nada).
20.
naHna,
nain.
'eye,' 7,
H. Pb.
ninna,
nidittha,
'
low,'
'
46.
nenu.
informed,' p. 93, n.
'
13.
niddaa,
naara,
'city,' 9. p. 122, n. 1.
'
nayara, JM.,
pitiless,' p.
niddnati,
nipphala,
nibbanda
n. 11."
'
'
fruitless,' 38.
nam,
(l)
(2)
94,
5.
nakkha,
naccana,
najjai,
'
'
'
nail,' 15.
p.
117, v. 64.
will
investigate,'
p.
9.
is
'
nattaa,
known,' drama,'
'
'
135, n.
43.
2.
nivadanta,
n. 10.
'
falling
down,'
84,
nattha
(1)
(2)
lost.' 125.
placed,' p. 123, n.
nivanna,
'
entered,' p. 123, n.
p. 101,
natthi,
naraejja.
'
'
isn't,' 83.
'
namayam,
' '
meekness,' p. 135,
nivaha, 'multitude,'
v. 7.
14.
4.
may
bend,' p. 115, v.
nivuttT, 'returned,'
nivuttu. nivesavia,
n. 13.
60.
Apa.
narinda, king,' 81. navara, only,' p. 121, v. 8?'. navari, ' thereupon,' p. 120, v. 82. navahl, Apa. = (namanli) 25.
H
'
'
made
be poured out,'
niv-vavedi,
niwiggha,
10.
p. 96, n.
'
na'iip,
'
nauna, to know,' 136. [Jain MSS., absol., p. 139, n. 1. vary in the use of initial n and
'
nivvinna, disgusted,' p. 87, n. 2. nivvuo, 'finished, etc' p. 108 (d). nivvudha, 'accomplished,' p. 116.
v.
(52.
'
n].
nadha
naham,
Ilia,
(M. naha).
'
'
protector,'
14.
nisagga,
nisamenti,
nisiara,
'
nature.' p. Ill
(c).
(1)
83.
AMg.
nihada),
'
AMg.,
niyaya,
(2)
nihfla
(6.
struck down.'
p.
p. 121, V. 85.
niya. niatta, ' returned,' =nivutta. niattaissadi, fut. caus. 134. niattSidurn, caus., inf 136. niattihihi, fut. caus , p. 120. v. 84. niala, ' fetter.' p. 169. nikkam ' go out,' 38.
,
124,
nihasa, M.. rubbing,' 19. nihaa, 'smashed,' p. 121, v. 85. nihuda, (M. nihua) secret, etc.* 00.
'
nikkiva,
nikkhitta,
p. 81,
'
cruel,' p. 108
^la
(6.
nida),
'
'
led.'
125.
cf.
(c).
riia.
'
placed,' p. 101. n. 5.
nisasa,
nisesa,
2.
'entire,' p. 135, v.
'
I.
nikkhividum,
inf.,
40.
niccalH,
nijja,
'
nu^a^l, now,'
7, 20.
136, v. 13.
136.
(ti).
nijjida.
vanquished,' p. 84, n. 1. nijjhaida, looked at.' p. 98. n. 1. nijjhaanti, tliey look at,' p. 102,
' '
to load,'
^eura,
'anklet,' p. 109
'
n. 7.
Ijlgochadi,
83.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
nena,
nedi,
' '
203
6.
by
this,' 110.
neda,m=nu + etad,
neha,
'
83, p. 94, n.
47.
8.
leads,' 127.
tisu,
'
in three,' 112.
affection ,'=sineha
'
nehihi,
jasmine,'
75.
tujjha,
V.
125.
nhai,
'
bathes,'
'
125.
nhana,
tutta, 'broken,'
tuttai,
'
125.
is
'
broken,'
pleased,'
125.
T
tar, loc.
'
tuttha,
p.'
125.
in thee,' 107.
tal, rae,
Apa. 'thee,'
'
107.
by
(1)
thee,'
106.
107.
tao,
=tado.
'
tume, AMg.,
(2)
three,'
'
AMg.,
112.
tumma, M.,
tumhakera,
'
'
tam,
(1)
him, her,
it,'
108.
thou,'
(2) 'thou,' M., 107. tamsi, loc. AMg., 109. takkissadi, fut., 134.
tumharisa,
'
tnmhe,
'
'
you,'
106.
1.
takkemi,
'
I guess,' 45.
'
Pb. takk-.
turukka, incense,' p. 157, n. tuUa, 'equal,' p. 110 (a), tuvara, hasten,' 57.
'
time,' p. 90,
,
tacca, meritorious,' p. 151 n. tada, edge,' p. 124, n. 5. tanua, ' small, p. 121, v. 86. tanhiae, abl., 94.
'
8.
tuvatto, from thee,' 107. tussadi, is pleased,' 125. tuha, of thee,' 106. tuharn, thee,' 107. tuhu,'Apa. 'thou,' 107. musical instrument,' tura, JM.,
'
'
'
'
'
tatta,
tatto,
'
(1)
p. 128, n.
2.
1.
teyasa,
AMg.
^tejasa,
'
from
'
thee,' 107.
tebbho, AMg.,
telia,
tevatthi,
'
from
tattha,
there,' 45.
109.
sixty-three,' p. 144, n. 4.
tadha,
'so,' 14.
'
'
chief,' p. 144, n. 5.
tavana, heating,' p. 110 (6). tavida=tatta, 'hot,' 125. tassa, of him, 45. tahim=tassirn, 27.
'
TH
thana, breast,' 38. thala, -surface,' p. 101, n. 6. thavai, architect,' p. 127, n.
'
'
3.
4.
tae,
tava,
'
of,
'
tSo, abl.
38.
6.
=thii.
135.
thuvvai,
'
is
praised,'
ti,
thus,'
74.
p.
127,
tikhutto,
n. 8.
AMg.,
'thrice,'
152,
thero, thora,
'
'
tinni, 'three,'
tiriccha,
tirai,
'
112.
Pb. tinn.
74. 109.
H. tefhS.
1
p. 123, n.
135,
15.
127.
204
damsadi, damsanta,
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
bites," 125.
dimmuha,
'
'
facing
the
19.
quarters,'
damsanijja,
137.
worth
35, 46.
showing,'
dihi, M.,
'
firmness,'
it
daipsida,
(I)
'shown,'
diadu,
'let
be given,'
p.
93,
damsedum,
dakkhina,
134.'
'
n 1. diva, 'lamp,'
dlsai,
dihaurn,
17.
H. diya.
p.
dakkhina,
'appears,'
'
115.
103.
v.
14.
dacchara, M.
AMg.
6. disadi, 125.
long-lived,'
duara,
'
door,'
'
'
57.
dukkha,
see,' 136, p.
datthuip, 'to
v."80.
'
119,
duggada,
7.
'
38.
'
rascal
p.
122, n.
3.
'
p.
119,
dunnimitta,
n. 2
bad omen,'
84,
v.'Sl.
duttara,
'
invincible,'
'
38.
duddha,
'poor,'
'
milk,'
34.
Pb. duddh.
dalidda,
davavia,
n. 4.
'
26
125,
made
to give,' p.
134.
p.
dubbhejja,
n. 6.
'
'impervious,'
101,
9.
dull aha,
dulaha.
'
difficult,'
50.
Also
danim,
79.
duvara,
'
door,'
57.
damaguna,
darao,
'
2.
dava=<5uo<,
davaggi.
davijjau,
'
3.
'
125.
dussaha,
n. 11.
'
intolerable,'
'
51.
duha kaum,
having
split.' p. 124,
134.
p.
dahini,
dia,
'
= dakkhina,
112(a),
p.
p. 146, n. 3.
twice-born,'
42.
136,
dusa,
'
robe,' p. 157, n. 6.
V. 11.
dusah.a= dussaha.
72.
dia,r8i= devara,
de,=^e,
deula.
9.
3.
diaha, 'day,'
dikkhS,
'
9.
temple,'
82.
consecration,' p. 93, n.
'
dejja,
'
'
13S.
dijjadi,
is
given,'
119.
dedi,
ditttia, 'seen,'
125.
devattae=de?'nff'5v.
92,
ii.
devSnuppiya, AMg.,
'
beloved
of
95.
of.
p.
93,
didha,
firm,'' 60.
dadha.
dina,
'
day,' p. 97, n.
5.
126, p. 97,
5,
do,
'
two,'
112.
donha(m),
ins.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
8u(m), doggacca,
106," V. 76.
'
205
city,'
poverty,'
p.
(2)
'
of the
.JM.
=S.
1, 2.
1.
dohala,
'
longing.'
23.
paottha,
'
courtj'ard,'
102, n.
pakka,
'
cooked,'
'
42.
DH
dhaya, JM., 'flag,' p. 130, n. dhQ.minai, = dharma, 48. dhamraia, juggler,' p. 82, n.
'
'
1.
1.
pagSra, JM., kind,' p. 125, n. 4. pagasa. AMg., clear,' p. 156, n. 6. pagasento, JM., revealing,' p. 122,
'
dharia, 'waited,' p. 129, n. 13 dhai, dhaai, places,' S 127. dharidutp, to support,' 136.
'
n. 2.
paecaa,
JM.,
trust,' p. 91, n. 6.
'
dhida,
dhiya.
S.
'daughter,'
cf.
74.
paccakkha,
n. 11.
'
vi.sible,' p.
98, n.
2.
dhuda.
paccacakkhldum,' to repulse,'
paccanida, restored,' AMg., paccutthuya.
p. 160,
li.
p. 89,
dhua, 'agitated,'
dhuam,
'
125.
'covered,'
'present,'
8.
dhunai, 'shakes,' 131. dhunijjai, is shaken,' 135. dhuvai, washes,' 129. Also dhu'
4.
paccupanna,
p. 155, n. 5.
AMg.,
vei
128.
'
dhuvvai,
is
shaken,'
135.
paccuse,
'
at dawn," p. 87, n.
'
dhuda
JM., dhuya), (M. dhua. 'daughter,' 19. p. 129, n. 12. Also S. duhida. dhumai, smokes,' p. 104, v. 13.
'
paecha,
'
afterwards,'
38.
pajjatti, 'sufficiency,' p. 141, n. 6. Also pajjattia, p. 110 (c). pajjalai, blazes,' p. 104, v. 13.
Pajjunna=Prad^?<ina,
pajjussua, 'excited.'
n.
1.
46.
dhuva,
'
incense,' p. 157, n.
1.
41, p.
168,
129.
AMg.,
40,
pataa,
patta,
'
'
flag,' p. 101
bandage
'
4.
'
paada, (M.)
p."
'
'
evident,'
JM. payada,
,
n. 3.
136, V. 17. setout,' 125. paatta, p." 118, V. 76. payatta, 124, n.
'
9. 3.
paatta,
JM.,
p.
1.
15.
'
tUka),
1
;
16.
cf
On p.
101,
n.
9.
cf.
20.
padi.
padia
painna, 'scattered,'
paidi,
n.
1.
'
125.
AMg., 'beginning,'
husband,' p. 118, v.
'
p.
78.
168,
paiiyngaramane, AMg.,
vigil,' p. 145, n. 1.
p. 147, n. 7^
'
keeping
p. 93,
pai,
paiinjai,
uses,' 125.
paditthavida
125,
p.
= pratisthapita,
pautta
(1)
(2)
'used'
'
90,
1
n.'8.
paiittha,
'
paditthia,,
'
padivajjadi
'
padivanna.
V. 83.
'
paiima,
'
padivesia,
9
(pro-
'
paiira, (1)
'abundant,'
cur a).
padihai
127.
(6.
206
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
p. 135,
parisa,
n. 7.
AMg.,
'
'
community,'
p. 145,
padhana,
'
reading,'
'
16.
parissauli,
'
embraces,'
49.
padhama,
padhium,
padhiadi,
' '
first,' 20.
2.
is
pariharia, 'avoiding,' p. 84, n. 8. parunna, cried out,' p. 119, v. 76. parokkha, invisible,' p. 94, n. 3.
'
panaa,
'
'
confidence,' p. 91, n.
3.
v. 76;
1.
panamami, panamaha,
panasa,
^(6.
'
I salute,' p. 95, n.
paliovama, AMg.,
n. 8.
'
'
revere,' p. 113
'
'
myriad,' p. 147,
1.
(6).
phanasa),
bread-fruit,'
'
palobheum,
'
'
to allure,' p. 123, n.
[pannattam,
p. 145, n. 3.]
AMg.,
.> perceived,
panha,
pataria,
'
'
palohida, 'greedy,' p. 102, n. 9. pallattha, .surrounded, etc.,' 60. hamlet,' p. 136, v. 17. palli, palhatta, brought to nought,' 52,
* '
10.
p. 121, v. 85.
cf.
H. palta.
'
Mar.
patta
45. 125. (2) patteya, 'alone,' p. 130, n. 11. ' severally,' p. 141, n. 11.
(1)
'
palat.
palhayanijja,
p. 158,' n. 7.
AMg.,
refreshing,'
37.
pavarnga, 'monkey,'
patthana,
'
request,' p. 83, n.
'
2.
patthara,
57.
6. patthida, p. 82, n. 4. padolika, gateway,' p. 169. panti or pamti, row,' 35, p. 102,
display,' 111 (e). pavattai, occur,' 125. pavasanta, ' living abroad,' p. 106, V. 94. pavittha, 'entered,' p. 88, n. 2;
' '
pavanca,
pavutta,
n. 5.
papalinu,
n. 10.
'
fled
'
pabodhiami,
pabbhattha,
n. 8.
am
'
pavvaia,
'
slipped
p.
90,
p. 130, n. 12 (pravrajita). pavvaittae, inf. AMg., p. 146, n. 2. pasammai, ' is soothed,' p. 115, n. 6.
pabhada,
'
morning,
p. 97, n. 8, 9.
4.
pamada,
n. 5.
'
goest
forward,"
7.
'
pleasure,' p. 94,
presented,' p. 98, n.
,
p.
159,
pasida,
n. 2.
paramatthado, really,' p. 90, n. 2. parassim = parasmin, 111. parahua, cuckoo,' p. 157, n. 7. pariynga, AMg.,' wandering,' p. 146.
'
p. 84, n. 92.
1.
n." 10.
parikamma,
pariggaha,
p. 83,
V. 20.
'
pahada = pabhada,
'
parlccaia,
n. 6.
'
having abandoned,'
p.
p. 88, n. 4. 94, n. 3.
cf.
'beginning," pabhii.
n. 10.
pariccatta,
'abandoned,'
'
115,
to
n. 4.
be made to pariaedavva,
125.
'
payacchitto,
n. 4.
'
expiation,'
p.
152,
pSikka.
'
foot-soldier,' 82.
parinlda,
'
married,'
paiia
(6.
puuda).
'
'
Prakrit,'
12,
pariluppamana, JM.,
'
being des
p. 103, v. 2.
50,
136.
''''*
123,
n.'S.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
paunitttl, 'fulfilling,'
207
102; fut. puloissam,
*
AMg.,p.
146,
puloanto,
134.
n.lO.
puvvaratta, AMg.,
first
2.
'
part of
pausa, JM., rains,' p. 139, n. 7. pnga, AMg., refined,' p. 158, n. 6. thief,' p. 1G5, n. 5. padaccale, Mg.
' ' , '
puvvanupuvvim, AMg.,
in succes'
asked,'
earth,'
padava, tree,' p. 87, n. 3. parnvana, pigeon,' p. 157, n. 7. pariyaya, JM., 'coral tree,' p. 128,
'
'
puhavi
p.
' '
(S.
!
pudhavl),
'
118, V. 78.
n. 5.
paridosia, 'reward,'
doSia.
ll.Mg.,pali 125.
peccha, see ', 40. pecchai, sees,' p. 114, v. 57. pecchae, atm., 115. pecchissarn, M., I will see,' 118.
'
pasa,
'
side,' 49.
pekkhacii,
pokkhissam,
khihimi.
'
panada,
n. 4.
pahunaya,
pek-
JM
pemma,
74.
'
pi=api,
'
declension, V. 86.
(a),
peranta,
'
limit,' 76.
paternal aunt,'
74.
pikka,
*
'
ripe,'
69=pakka.
pida,
6.
gen. piduno, piuno. sion, 97 pivai, pivadi, 'drinks.' 125. pidhamadda, ' parasite,' p. 160,
n. 2.
sent,' p. 82, n. 3. sends,' p. 128, n. 6. peskami, Mg. , ' I see,' p. 168, n. pokkhara, ' lotus,' 38, 71. pokhar, ' tank.' pottha, ' belly,' p. 107, v. 171. popphall, ' areca nut,' 74.
'
pesida,
'
pesei,
4.
H.
pomnna,
p. 145, n.
'lotus,'
36,
82,
cf.
pinanijja,
AMg.,
'
'pleasing,' p. 158,
n. 7. pisei, pisedi,
74,
crushes,' 65.
'
pucehai, pucchadi,
puttlia
(1)
'
asks,' 60.
PH
phamsa,
phagguna,
' '
back,'
JM.
Gfij.
thi.
puth.
phadiha,
'
Alsophaliha,
puijna
'
(1) 'full,'
'soft,'
p.
161,
(2)
'
meritorious,'
n. 2 (*sparsaka).
(g).
90,
phusai, AMg.,
'
touches,'
38.
puttalia,
'
puppha,
puhup.
purattha,
'
'flower,'
38.
3.
O.H.
bailie,
H. phup.
East,' p. 160, n.
71.
Mg.,
'
'bull,'
p.
170,
n.
9.
Apa.
badifia,
baiilu.
is
,
purisa, 'man,'
purisakkara,
strength,'
'
bajjhai,
with
man's
Mg
'
hook,' p. 166, n.
2.
AMg.,
104.
'
p. 153, n. 3.
92.
baddha,
bandhai,
'bound,'
binds,'
125.
10.
125.
man,'
bappha,
pros. past.
'
steam,' p. 84, n.
puloedi,
looks
at,'
69
bainbana=brahmana,
52.
208
'
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
bhavissam,
n. 5.
(c).
'
bal,
bhaveam,
'
'
'
might
be,' 129.
shines,' p. 112
'sister's
(g^).
6.
bhadi.
144,
bahini. sister," s 19. bahuphala fruitful,' 5. barasa, twelve.' p. 130, Apa baraha. H. barah.
'
127.
'
bhainejja,
n.
2.
son,'
p.
'
M.
n. 2.
cf. 24.
bhadusaa.
bhiudi,
baha,
'
64.
AMg.
JM.
'second,'
p. 136, V. 19.
bhijjai, V. 56.
split,"
135,
p.
114,
125.
133.
cf.
bhinna,
split,' 125.
'
buya, AMg.,
'
'
might
say,'
bola, speech,' p. 124. n. 8. cf. H. bolna. ' bolanti, they pass,' p. 114, v. 57. bolina, ' passed.' p. 120. v. 83.
bhindai, splits,' 1_'5, 130. bhia, bhida, frightened,' 125. bhujjai, is enjoyed,' 135. bhunjiadi. bhunjadi, enjoys,' 125. 130. bhutta. 'enjoyed,' 125. bhumaa, brow.' p. 117, v. 64.
'
"
S.
BH
bhaavam,
103.
'
become,'
125.
split.' 136.
blessed,'
declension,
bhoana,
bhottum,
'
'
bhai,
'
hire,' p. 150, n. H.
'
bhakkanti, they eat,' p. 102, n. Rather bhakkhanti, vide 40. bhagga, broken,' p. 129, n. 6.
'
M.
hoi.
M
maa,
(l)
is
p.
116,
'dear,' p. 112
'
p.
{<7).
87,
n.
."J;
(mvrga).
bhajia,
bhanjai,
'
'
Also mia.
(2)
{mada).
bhatta,
lord,'
'
declension.
'
97
60.
(3) (4)
dead,'
125.
{mrta).
p.
gen. bhattino.
'
mode of {=maya),
105, V. 11.
bhanaii,
bhanedi,
niadi,
'
'
128,
bhatta,
raaanijja, p. 158, n.
AMg..
1.
'
'invigorating,'
p. 120, n. 9.
bhatta,
97
;
husband,'
blessed,' 45.
declension,
maarahara,
V. 83.
sharks' home,'
'
gon. bhattuno.
'
bhadda,
through.
H. bhalS
cf.
Apa. *bhallau.
alia,
M.,
AMg..
{ardra).
'wet,'
p.
=6.
107 (a).
adda
H.
bhamara,
'
'
bee,'
maalaiichana, moon,' p. 94, mai, loc, in me,' 106. mai, Apa., by me,' 107. -maia = ma i/a. mai, doe,' p. 108 (6).
'
'
p. 101
n. 2,
maiila, 'bud,'
maiilanta,
'
71.
v. 62.
bhavam = 6/tauan
103.
'
declension,
maura = mora,
82.
mao, by
'
nie,' 106.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
mamsuim, mamsuni,
AM<j;.,
209
festival,' 81.
mous-
M.
'
mother,'
declension,
97.
magga,
road,'
'
45.
maridum,
'
to strike,' 136.
tj
inagganta,
mala,
'
garland,' declension,
'
91.
V.
10.
'
maocha,
majjara,
jara.
fish,' 56, p.
'
114, v. 56.
S.
fat,' 67.
M. mam4.
n".
3.
midhuna,
S.
'
pair.s,'
ij
92.
majjida,
swept,' p. 100, n.
'
mittca =niaitreya,
72.
jj
majjha
p.
(1)
(2)
middle,'
'
44.
milana,
16.
'
misimisinta,
p.
159,
n.
missa
'
(M. misa),
'
mixed,'
125.
1.30,
49.
majjhanna, midday,'
jhamdine,
n. 3; also
at
mua, muda,
muai,
'
dead,'
majjhanha,
releases,'
'
p.
170,
v. 115.
majjhima,
mattia,
mitti.
middle,'
muinga,
inuccai,
'
drum,'
'
p. 130, n. 7.
'earth,'
55.
H. matti,
mukka,
mucchia,
manasa, manina,
manlsi.
'
ins., 104.
'
AMg.,
mujjhai,
'
'
is
perplexed,'
125.
'
manussa, 'man,'
maniisa,
63.
49.
36.
AMg.
muncai, muncadi,
S 125, 130.
'
releases.'
1 ;
manojja,
"
charming,'
S.
'
manoradha,
manairaha.
naandalagga.
V."
wish,'
14.
M.
116,
scimetar,'
p.
Also muncedi. 28 passive munciadi, 135, n. mutthi, handful,' p. 102, n. 3. JM.. mutthiga, p. 1.30, n. 12. munai, knows,' Pali munati.
'
61.
manne, '.I think,' 115. -matta= -metta, p. 119, v. 81. madda, crushing,' p. 88, n. 6. mamam, M., AMg., JM.. me,'
'
munala, mutta,
'
lotus fibre,'
60.
muddha,
mulla,
'
98.
107".
muha,
6.
'
mammadha,
maha),
muhala,
25.
'
marai, maradi,
dies,' 125.
(6.
make
release,'
maragaa, M.
moragada),
p.
emerald,'
12,
93,
n.
2.
p. 115, V. 6.
made
to release,'
mallia,
jasmine,' p. 101, n.
'
47.
, '
fish,' p. 166,
'
makes
'hammer,'
moccham, mocchihimi,
'
will
re-
mahara,
'
103.
lease, '" 134, p. 118, V. 76. motta, pearl,' p. 115, n. 6. mottura, to release,' 136.
'
maharao,
mora,
'
'
peacock,'
are,'
82, p. 108
(b).
99, n.
mblla, 'price,'
precious,' p. 167, p. 117, v. 75.
8.
71.
H. mol.
30,
132.
mahalika, Mg.
raahila,
'woman,'
'
mha, we mho.
Also
mahuara,
14
mhi,
'
am,'
S 30, 132.
210
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
B
raa
,
laddha,
25.
4.
'
gratified
'
,'
'taken,' 34, 125: inf. laddhurn, S 136: passive labbha, labbliadi, S 1.34. Also lambhiadi.
raia,
formed,' p. 129, n.
'
135.
'
ralsara,
lahai,
AMg.
rannau, 92. ranna, by the king,' 99. rattim, during the night.'
'
'
p.
87,
n. 7.
ramai, rassi,
ravai,
'
'
delights,'
'
j?
125.
9.
rasSala.
'
lower world,'
S
takes,' 125. take.' p. 95. n. 2. lahua, 'light,' S 13. lahum, 'quickly,' p. 91, n. 2. lahe, 1 take.' atm.. 115. lahearn, opt., p. 88, n. 7. laaklya, Mg. , ' royal,' 165, n. 1. laiile, Mg., palace," 82. lautte. Mg. , :=rajapiUrnh, p. 160. n. 1.
lahetsu,
' ' '
ray,'
lia,
'
litta,
1 1
Also Una.
n. 3 (Up).
rahasa,
force' (rabhasa), p.
(/).
libbhai,
lihai, (1) (2)
'
is
'
licked,'
135.
licks,' 125.
'
writes,'
'
p.p.
lihida.
S.
Jj
99.
raia, 'mustard,' p. 107, v. 128. ral, road,' p. 87, n. 4. raesi, royal sage,' 80.
'
painted,' p. 100, n. 5. lukka, sticking to,' p. 105, v. 49. luddha, hunter,' p. 87, n. 8. luppai, is robbed,' 125. lekkha, list,' p. 125, n. 5.
' '
'
'
16a, M.
world,'
92.
9.
Apa.
*!
lou.
;
riddhi,
93."
'
increase,'
58.
73.
AMg., JM.,
loga,
loc.
risi=rsi,
60.
AMg. ,plur.
risao,
logamsi,
129.
ruai, ' weeps,' 125. 125. ruia, bright,' ruccai, ruccadi, ' is made bright,' 125, 129. rujjhai, ' is obstructed,' 135. ruttha, angered,' 125.
' ij '
loua,
H.
'
salt,"
75.
Sindhi lunu.
lun.
loluva, 'greedy,' p. 108 (rf), (=/nlupa). lohara, blacksmith,' 82. ro/i,' p. 166, n. 4. lohida, Mg.
' , '
rundhedi,
'
82.
va = ira,
"
;
p. 108, n. 4.
'
ruvai, weeps.' Also rovai sive ruvvai, 125. rusai, is vexed,' S 125. rudhira, ' red,' ^ 13.
'
pas-
49.
ruva,
'
form,'
'
17.
(M.
rila,
Ji
9).
p. 145, n. 8. ' story,' p. 123, n. 7. vaiyara, , vaira, .M. 'hostile,' 61. vae. AMg., herd," p. 150, n. 5.
JM
'
'
reha, M.
rehai, M.
lines,' 94.
'
shines,' p. 103. v. 4.
vakkala,
bark,'
37.
roadi,
weeps,' S 125, p. 99, 7rodadi, rovai, ruai, ruvai: fut. rodissam, roccham, S 134; pass., rottum, inf. rodladi, 135;
'
vakkha,
vaggana, vaggura,
n.
".. '
136.
vaccha
(l)
'
ciiild,'
"
39 (ratsa).
(2) (3)
'
'
laa
(6.
lada),
'
121.
v.
14.
6.
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
vajjanti, is sounded,' p. 130. n. vajjia, excepting,' p. 84, n. 9. vajjha, * of execution,' p. KH), n.
' '
211
7.
vialia,
M.,
'
viinna,
n.'5.
AMg.,
'
bestowed,'
9.
p.
144,
17"),
viuha,
'
learned,'
vattadi, twins,' 45. vatti, box,' p. 157, n. 2. vatte, opt. of vattadi, 117. vatthida, engaged in,' 74.
'
viesa,
'
abroad,' p.
separation,'
' '
10(), v.
7G.
vioa,
'
9.
vikkaa,
sale,' p. 166, n. 5.
vada,
vadha,
-vadaa,
'
'fig-tree,'
15.
AMg.,
viggha,
obstacle,'
'
!?
.36.
19.
flag,' p. 130, n. 3.
'
vaddhida,
6.
vijju,
'
vatta,
leaf,' p. !y,n. 10; pp. 108. 3; p. 115, V. 6. vattia, 'paint brush,' p. 82, n. G. wick.' cf. H. batti, vattum, to speak,' 130. vattehami, I will perform,' 134. vaddhavanaarp, AMg., birth cere'
'
' '
vijjulia,
vijjhai,
'
lightning,'
p.
23.
wounds,'
35.
112
(a)-
Virnjha,
vidahara
vinajjai,
V. 82.
(?), p. 140, n. 2.
'is
'
perceived,'
p.
120,
'
vinadida.
puzzled,'
'
p. 96, n. G.
n. 5.
vinodemi,
vinnatta.
n.'
1 divert,' p. 99, n. 3.
'
reported,'
'
125, p. 93,
vammaha,
p. 172, V. 21.
' '
10.
is
M.,
'love,'
25,
vinnaviadi,
p."
reported,'
125,
95, n.
3.
varittha, choicest,' 111 (6). varisa, rain,' 57. valia, 'turned round,' 111 (/). vavadesi, pretending,' p. 91, n.
' '
vinnada, 'understood,'
125.
'
vinnavei
5.
(S.
vinnavedi),
inf.
re-
ports,'
p. 94 n. n. 2.
1
;
125;
vavasissam, I will decide,' p. 89, 5. vasantusava, spring-festival,' 81. vasaha, bull,' 60. vasahi, dwelling.' 19=vasai.
'
'
vittharena,
I
vidduma,
'
vasa, by force of,' 92. -vaha, 'path,' p. 115, v. vahai, 'carries,' 125.
'
14.
'
vahu,
91vaai,
vai,
'
'bride,'
13; declension,
S.
9.
vimukka, vimuha,
'
'
vaasa,
'
vaadi.
vimhaa,
vimhanijja,
p. 158, n.
M.=vaai,
;
'
127.
vimharia=vlsaria,
90. p.
p. 109 (d).
vau, wind'
vadaana,
n. 5.
declension,
'
vivajjai,
158,
window,'
p. 102, n. 6.
vamaddana,
massage,'
'
perishes,' p. 123, n. 3. vivara, aury,' p. 121 v. 85. vivujjhadi, ' awakes,' p. 97, n. 7. visaraghadanta, 'dispersing,' p. 100,
'
' ,
V. 115. visalla, 'pointless,' p. 176, n. vissa, ' musty,' p. 166, n. 6. vissama, rest,' p. 88, n. 7.
'
2.
1.
vi=api,
via,
'
3, 74.
').
like,' p. 81, n.
'
viana,
pain,' 72. viambhidam, ' exploit, p. 94, n. viala, ' lame,' p. 88, n. 7.
7.
vihatthimitta, AMg., 'measure of a span ,' 69. vihalia, trembling,' p. 124. n. 7. vihana, "manner,' p. 123, n. 3. vihadi, 'shines,' 127. vihi, performance,' p. 93, n. 9. vihu, moon,' p. 136, v. 19. viana, fanning,' p. 144, n. 5.
'
'
'
'
212
visaip,
'
INTEODtrOTION TO PRAKRIT.
twenty,'
112.
khala,
sakbal.
sihkhala,
ij
35.
Mar
pearl,'
' takest visameisi, rest,' 105, p. V. 49. visasadi, ' trusts,' p. 91, n. 4. visaria, ' forgotten,' p. 109 (d).
H.
sikar.
'
Bg. jikal.
of
p.
samkhasutti,
p. 103, V. 4.
mother
samkhaa,
V. 63.
'coagulated,'
'
116,
p. 117, v. 75.
samkhoa,
shock,' p.
14. v. 3.
vuccai,
'
is
'
vuddha.
samghia, 'applied,'
p. ll(i, v. 01.
v. 80.
true,' S 44. verified," p. 109 (e). sacchaha, of the same hue,' p. 102 n. 2.
'
sacca,
saccavia,
'
'
sajja,
'
ready," p. 128,
'
1.
vGlia,
'
veyana, AMg.,
n. 6.
sajjha,
satthaa,
practicable,'
'
63.
veccham.
pain,' p. 96, n. 1. ' I shall know,' 134. vejja, 'learned,' 61. vedha, 'enclosure,' p. 115, v. 14. vedhia, 'enclosed,' p. 115, v. 14. vedia, 'raised seat,' etc., p. 101,
n. 5.
veana,
twilight,' 44. troop,' p. 112 (a), satthia, ' weapon,' p. 140, n. 7. sanha, ' smooth.' p. 160, n. 5. sannia, ' made of sign,' p. 124, n. 8. sannihie, in vicinity,' p. 122, n. 5.
'
samjha,
'
satta
(1)
(2)
'
seven.'
etc." (sattra).
'nature,
'
vedissarn= veccham,
verulia,
V. 78.
'
sada,
112.
p.
S.,
hundred.'
S
M. saa,
34.
5t
12
vehavvam, 'widowhood,'
118,
sadda,
n. 12.
'
sound,"
'
Pb. sadd
p.
H. sad.
saddavia,
sutnrnoned,'
vo, 'you, of you,' 106, 107. vocchani, 'I will speak,' S 134. vojjha, to be carried,' 137.
'
124
p. 146
vodhum,
to carry.' 136. vottum, ' to speak.' 136. voliya, JM., 'passed,' p. 129, n. 8. M. bolina. M. bolo, cf. cry.' volo, JM., ' speech.'
'
'
saddhasa,
[Saddhike,
n. 3.
'
panic,' p. 84, n. 5.
Mg..
'feast,'
p.
168
samtappadi,
li.
'is in distress,' p. 98
3.
sa
(1
'
with.'
(sfl).
(2)
own'
(sva), p. 95, n.
(>.
saa,
(f^.
sada.
AMg., saya.
SS
Mg.,
112,
n. 14
Sada),
'hundred,'
'2,
p. 144, n. 4.
sabbhava, 'good
p. 89, n. 7.
nature,'
34
10
saada,
'
S 16.
saadia, toy cart,' p. 98. n. 8. saasa, presence,' p. 82, n. 7. samlehana, AMg., "final mortifica'
samaa,
'contract,
p.
8!t,
2.
n.
'doctrine.' p. 150, n.
samagga
n. 3.
coniplett>,'
p.
129.
tion,' p. 147, n. 6.
samsaida, 'questioned,'
saki<ai,
n. 5
p. 89, n. 6. p.
samannagaya,
.AMg.,
'
provided
sakkei,
'
is
able,'
123,
with,' p. 147, n. 4.
samappida,
'Sanskrit.
S
1.3.3.
ii.
!j
Hakkada,
."akkft,
'
II.
n. 3;
able,'
'
n
3.
.">.
sakkara,
samadhatta, 'begun,'
p. 147, n. 3.
p. 127, n. 4.
'
being,
sahkala,
chain,'
19.
Also san-
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKUIT.
[damalovide,
p. 107, n. 7.
213
(M. sariccha),
Mg.,
'
mounted,'
I
sarikkha,
40, C(^
'like"
samasattha,
n.
1.
'
'consoled,'
125. p. 131,
Salavahana,
23.
sahai,
samuggaa,
saraudaara,
box,' p. 82, n.
' '
6.
125; imporat. sahasu, p. 118, v. 76; gerund. AMg. sahetta, p. 141, n. 10.
'tells,'
'
samucchida,
sahania, praiseworthy,'
7.
I
49.
sahavo,
si,
'
'.saints,' 93.
samudda,
p. 145, n.
'
ocean,'
45.
'
'
art,' 132.
samuppajjittha, AMg.
2.
occurred,'
siya,
AMg.,
'
may
'
be,' S 133.
samupehiyanara,
AMg.. 'perceivp.
siala,
jackal,' 60.
H.
sial.
simba, simgha,
sikkhavaiya.
p. 145, n. 4.
101,
sikkhida, learnt,'
sijjhai,
40.
'is
,
fulfilled.'
125; fut.
sainpehei,
n. 3
:
AMg..
'
reflects,' p. 152,
AMg
sitlha,
'
n. 3.
sambalayam, JM.,
n. 7.
_
47.
cf.
neha.
100,
sambhariuna,
p. 120, v! 84.
remembering,'
1.
'
sitta,
n.
4.
'sprinkled,'
08.
'
'
125,
p.
samma, AMg.,
'
'
'
right,' p. 145, n.
4.
siri=sVi,
'
sisa,
!
camp,'
sarisa,
[6ala,
like,' 24.
,
Mg.
accent," p. 109, n.
2.
I ;
cf.
simha.
(c).
05.
salalia, 'praise,'
57.
(/).
' ,
rum,' p. 110
hard.'
S
savana,
'
ear,' p. ill
sua,
H. saut.
suai,
(I)
'
125.
36.
(2)
'
-parrot' (suka).
132.
'
sleeps,'
suandhi.
'
savva,
'
all," 50.
'
H. sab.
7.
savvannu,
savvanaru,
AMg.
SUkkha,
sujjhai,
'
dry,'
savvesiin.
H. sukha.
is
38.
purified,"
125.
(d).
sassiriada.
'
'
loveliness,' p. 101, n. 8.
S
38.
131. S.
siuiadi,
;
49.
sahassa,
'
'
thousand,'
'
49.
i
132 gerundive sunidavva, 137 passive, suniadi 135, n. -grog-shop,' [Sundikagala, Mg.
; ,
p'.
'l08, n. 3.
p. 90, n. 6.
sunua, 'empty.'
sunna.
Pb.
H.
sijna.
49.
Mg.
6.
175, n.
'hears,' 125, 12S, 131. sunai. sunha, ' daughter in-law,' p 100,
cf.
SUnedi,
V. 107.
saunia, fowler,' p. 87, n. 8 Sauntala, p. 88, n. 2. sao, ' from his own,' p. 152, u.
'
sutta
7.
(I) 'asleep,'
34, 125.
(2)
=sutra.
214
suttaa,
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
AMg.,
6.
'
sodavva=soavva.
sodhania,
n. 4.
'
'
137.
hoard.' 126. cf. sua. suddha, 'purified, 125. siindaraara, more beautiful," p. 109 (a).
'
suda,
to
be purified,'
p.
89,
10 (a).
S
57.
sir,' 48, 61. sleeps,' 132. sovana, stairs,' p. 102, n. 5. sohagga, 'auspicious,' p. 101, n. 4.
.somma, good
' '
sovai, sovadi,
Also sumaredi, 128. (M. bharai. p. 120, V. 84) ; caus. part, sumaravida, p. i'O, n. 3.
summai,
'
is
heard,'
'
135
(</).
'
struck,' taken,'
hia.
125. 125.
cf.
suvai, 'sleeps.'
125.
suvahum.
n. 12.'
'
very
much,'
p.
5.
123.
hage, AMg.,
hafi, 107.
Apa.
8.
1.
suvina, 'dream," p. 128, n. SUVO, to-morrow," 57. suvvai, is heard,' 135. I shall wait sussuissam,
'
hattha,
hanai,
'
'
delighted,' p. 145, n.
p. 170, n.
upon,'
134.
' '
hattha,
haddhi,
'
hand.'
!;
38.
'
suhaa,
fortunate," p. 110 (a). suaa, spy," p. 165, n. 6. suida, JM., suiya, 'shown.' p. 128,
n. 5.
hammai,
se,
(1)
AMg.,
'he.'
Mg.,
6e,
j;
109.
'him,' AMg. (3) 'his.' M., AMg.,S., 109. (4) 'her,' AMg. (Mg. ie gen.). they, them,' AMg. (Mg. 6e), (5)
(2)
'
4.
Mg.
hasedi.
'
laughs.'
'
128.
12. cf.
hia, hida,
'
taken,'
haa.
109.
sea,
(1)
'
sweat'
{.iveda).
'
9, (50:
abl. 92.
(2)
(3)
'
AMg.
.AMg.
seya,
white,' p. 144,
'
n. 5 {sveta).
seyam, better,' 14G, n. 2 (sveyas). sela, rock,' p. 109 (6). aohaUa, vitex,' p. 94, n. 10.
'
p.
hio, yesterday,' 58. hihgulaa, 'cinnabar,' p. 157, n. 7. hutta, 'facing,' p. 108 (c), p 121.
>?
V. 85.
SO, 'he,'
soa, (1)
(2)
'
108.
p. 123,
'
shall
grief {oka).
'
hua,
137.
13(),
'
become,'
125.
cf.
bhua.
"-'f-
H. hua.
hoi,
'
(muea).
!i
becomes.'
6. bhodi.
*
109
I--'-
'i""
vai.
p.
103,
(<;)
gerund.
V. 2.
be,' 133.
n. 8.
sonlia=sunha,
p. KXi,
\'.
107.
8.
being,' p. 119, v. 80. hotthS, AMg., ' was,' p. 144, n. 1. thou 1 am.' S 129, hosi, homi,
hottani,
'
'
.Mg.
art.'
hossani=havis3ain,
hohii. 'it will be."
134.
134.
STUDENTS' BIBLIOaKAPHY.
[This Hat
is
Prakrit,
intended to assist the student to extending his knowledge of and to serve as a guide to ('oUege Libraries.
Prakrit.
(1).
A.
Grammars,
(Dr.
etc.
Pischel
Richard)
Grammatik der
of
Prakrit-
Sprachen.
["Grammar
Forms one volume (Band 1, Heft 8) of the Grundriss der Indo-Arisehen Philologie und Altertumskunde. Strassburg, 1900. 500 pages. Price l-ls.-6d.
[Deals with Jain Prakrits, Dramatic Prakrits, Pai^aci and Apabhrani^a. A monument of industry and sound scholarship. A student who was worked through this "Introduction," should be able to make use of this work of reference, without any knowledge of German, by studying the examples given. The book contains an index of more unusual and special
forms. ]
(2).
A complete Index
lished
to Pischel's
Grammar
(3).
Jacobi
(Dr. Hermann). Ausgewahlte Erzahlungen in Maharashtri, zur Einfiihrung in das Studium des Prakrit. ["Selected Narratives in Maharastrl as an introduction to the study of Prakrit."] Leipzig. 1886.
[As regards the classification of Prakrits, and in some details of derivation this book is no longer up to date. For .Jain Maharastrl it gives a concise account (in German) of Phonetics and Grammar, 86 pages of Selections, and a Vocabulary (PrakritSanskrit-Grman). Nos. V. and IX of the Selected Narratives have been annotated and translated in this " Introduction" also portions of No. Ill to illustrate Ardha-Magadhl.]
;
(4).
Cowell (Professor E.
B.). The Prakrta-Prakas'a, or the Prakrt Grammar of Vararuci with the commentary (Manorama) of Bhamaha with notes, an English Translation and index of Prakrt words to which is prefixed a short introduction to Prakrt Grammar. Second Issue. London, 1868.
;
tion,
[Unfortunately Bhamaha's commentary on the Xllth Secwhich deals with Sauraseni has been lost, and many of The corresponding the sutras are " obscure and corrupt." rules in Hemacandra's work are given in an Appendix, " but Bhamaha even these leave many difficulties unexplained." has sometimes misunderstood Vararuci.]
216
(5).
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Hemacandra
(n)
{vide
page
79).
Siddha-hema-candra (Adhyaya VIII deals with Prakrit), edited by Pischel, Parts I and II. Halle, 1877, 1880, with translation and notes. {Oerman).
Des'inamamala, edited by Pischel.
(G).
(ft)
Bombay,
1880.
(7).
Hcernle.
of the
I
The Prakrta-Lakanam
as Hoernle
or Canda's
Grammar
Calcutta, 1880.
Ar3a=AMg., not
.stated=AMg. +M.]
(8).
Biihler.
Edition of Prakrta-laksmih.
"The
by Dhanapala. Edited with critical notes, an introGottinduction and a glossary bv George Biihler "
gen, 1878.
B.
Texts.
(9).
Mdharasiri.
Hala.
(a)
Saptasatakam.
[Vocabulary
in
(Ftrfep. 73).
Edited by Weber.
Leipzig, 1881.
German,]
(10).
(6)
Kavyamala Series No. 21. Edited by Durgaprasad and Parab. Bombay, 1889.
[With Sanskrit commentary.]
(11).
Setubandha or Ravanavaha. (Firfep. 72), Edited by (a) Kavyamala Series No. 47. and Parab. Bombay, 1895.
[With Sanskrit version and commentary.]
(h)
S'ivadatta
(10).
(11).
Gaiidavaho, ed. Sh. P. Pandit. Bombay, 1887. Bombay Sanskrit Series XXXIV. Out of print, revised
I
edition expected.]
Dramatic Prakrits.
[It is unnecessary to enumerate editions of Sanskrit Plays. Many will be familiar to the student, others he will find in
Schuyler's bibliography. Very few editions givo a correct or consistent Prakrit text. This is mainlv due to corruptions in the iMSS.]
(12).
Karpuramaiijari
of Rajai^ekhara.
B Lanmau.
INTEODUOTION TO PRAKRIT.
217
[Harvard Oriental Series, Vol. 4. This play is also in the K. M. Series No. 4, edited Durga Prasad and Parab. Bombay,
1887.]
(13).
Kiel, 1877.
[Follows the Bengal version, edited with a sounder knowledge of Prakrit than Monier Williams' edition of 1867.]
(14).
Bombay,
1896.
Maya Sariiia. 1847. editions Stenzler, 1829. Hiranand and Parab., 1902. The last has been quoted in the extracts, as it is much used by students. Translation. Dr. A. W. Ryder, Harvard Oriental Series,
Calcutta,
Vol.
(15).
9.]
Rama
Ratnavall.
A second text of this, with a PrakritSanskrit glossary by Capeller, is given in Bohllingks Chrestomathic, p. 290 ff. St. Petersburg, 1877.
Ardha-Mdgadht.
(16).
Kalpasutra (Kappasutta),
[Translated
n. 3.]
ed. Jacobi, Leipzig, 1879. by Jacobi, S.B.E., XXII, vide p. 71, and p. 161.
(17).
Ayarangasutta,
[The
first
ed. Jacobi.
London, 1882,
1936).
(Calcutta edn.,
Samvat
Important
for prose.]
(18).
Suyagadangasutta,
[Second ahga.
Bombay.
for verse.
]
Samvat
1936.
Important
(19).
Uvasagadasao,
ed. Hcernle.
Calcutta, 1890.
(Bibliotheca Indica).
[Eleventh anga, contains narratives.
critically.]
Jain Mahdrdstri.
(20).
Avasyaka, Erzahlungen,
Leipzig, 1897.
ed. Ernst
Leumann.
Heft
1.
p. 139).
(22).
Kakkuka
Inscription.
218
INTRODDCTION TO PRAKRIT.
Jain Sauraseni,
(23).
Pavayanasara by Kundakundacarya.
(24).
Kattigeyanupekkha by Karttikeyasvamin,
darkar.
ed.
Bhan-
PaUaci.
Pali.
[It is
{Vide p. 68-69).
student
only necessary to mention a few books useful to the a special study of this language.]
Grammars,
(25).
and vocabulary.
(26).
a short grammar by Frankfiirter with selections A better grammar is that of M. Duroiselle.] Pali
Language.
Jatakas,
Triibner.
7 vols.
(-8).
,,
edited
by
(29).
Andersen
(Dines).
edited
Pali Reader.
Copenhagen.
(30).
(31).
Mahavamsa,
Text Society.
Old Prakrit.
Senart
The
carum.
difficult
volume of the Corpus Inscriptionum IndiAsoka's Edicts edited by Cunningham is to obtain and needs revision.
(33)
Franke
(Professor 0.)
IGerman.
Vide
INTRODUCTION TO PRAKRIT,
(34).
219
Liiders.
" Fragments
[German.
of
p. 6.
Pingala-chandahsutra or Prakrta-Pingala-siitra. vj'amala series No. 41, ed. Sivadatta and Parab.
[A
critical edition is needed.]
Ka-
^ Y
Hf
RETURN
TO#^
^^^^^'B.y..c.
,,,,,
^00U30S7